BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME FROM THE SAGE ENDOWMENT FUND THE GIFT OF Henrg W. Sage 1891 Asnn Cornell University Library The original of this book is in the Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/cletails/cu31924020348649 AI^ INTRODUCTORY HEBREW GRAMMAR. PEOGKESSIVE EXERCISES IN READING AND WBITING. Juat published, in demy &vo, price Is. 6d. , HEBREW SYNTAX. BY Rev. a. B. DAVIDSON, LL.D., D.D., PROFESSOR OF HEBREW AND OLD TESTAMENT EXEGESIS, NEW COLLEGE, EDINBURGH. EDINBUEGH : T. & T. CLARK, 38 GEORGE STREET. AS INTRODUCTORY HEBREW GRAMMAR. WITH ^roflressibe lExercises in Eeaaing anti Mvitins, BY A. B. DAVIDSON, M.A., LL.D., I'EOJESSOR OP HBBKEW, ETC., IN TUK NEW COLLEGE, EDINBITKCH. THIRTEENTH EDITION. EDINBUEGH: T. & T. CLAKK, 38 aEOEGE STEEET. 1896. s PRINTED BY MORRISON AND GIBB FOB T. & T. CLARK, EDINBURGH. lANDON : SIMFKIN. MARSHALL^ HAMILTON, EENT, AND CO. LIMITED NEW YORE : CHARLES SCRIBNEB S SONS. TORONTO : THE WILLARD TRACT DEPOSITORY. PREFACE TO THE TENTH EDITION. rilHE necessity for another Edition of tliis Introductory Grammar leads me to hope that it has been found useful to beginners in Hebrew, and that the attempt made in it to combine a statement of the principles of the language with progressive exercises for practice upon them has not altogether failed. In this Edition some parts in previous ones that appeared too brief and obscure have been made fuller and simplified ; examples have been added, where wanting, and some addi- tional Tables and Paradigms introduced. It is hoped that these changes will be found to be improvements. Some irregularity in the grammatical order of the sections has naturally been occasioned by the requirements of an Exercise Book. It was necessary, for example, to introduce the Inseparable Prepositions and the Conjunction at an early stage, and also to make the First Declension of Nouns precede the Verb, in order to have materials for the construction of VI PREFACE TO THE TENTH EDITION. sentences; but the proper grammatical order has been followed as closely as possible, and the outline of Grammar has been kept distinct from the Exercises, in order that, if desired, it may be used without them. I have to express my thanks to several scholars and teachers who have kindly offered me useful suggestions and corrections, particularly the Eev. J. T. Fowler, Vice-Principal of Bishop Hatfield's Hall, and Hebrew Lecturer in the University of Durham ; and to Mr. J. Iverach Munro, who has greatly helped me by reading the proofs. Edinbubch, November 1891. CONTENTS. SECTION PAOa 1. Hebrew Alphabet, ...... 1 2. Vowel Sounds. Vowel Letters, ... 3 3. External Vowel Signs, Massoretio Points, . . .6 4. Coalition of Massoretio and Textual Vocalization, . . 10 6. Principles of the Syllable, . . . . .11 6. The Vowel System and the Tone, . . , .13 7. Daghesh. The Letters Beghadhkephath, , , .17 8. The Gutturals, ....... 21 9. The Quiescents, ....... 23 10. The Accents. Metheg. Maqqeph. Pause, ' . . .25 11. The Article, ....... 30 12. Personal Pronouns, . . . . . .31 13. Demonstrative, Relative, and Interrogative Pronouns, . . 33 14. Inseparable Prepositions, . . . . .35 15. The Conjunction, . . . . . .37 16. The Noun. Inflection, ...... 88 17. Oases. Construct state, . . . . .41 18. First Declension, . . . . . .45 19. Pronominal Suffixes, . . . . . .48 20. The Verb. Perfect 51 21. The Imperfect, etc., . . . . . .55 22. Verb Transitive and Intransitive. (Active and Stative), . 57 23. The Moods. Vav Conversive, . . . . .60 24. Scheme of the Regular Verb, . . . . .64 25. Niph'al, 65 26. Pi'el, Pu'al, Hithpa'el, ...... 67 27. Hiph'll, Hoph'al, ...... 70 28. Skeleton Paradigm of Regular Verb, . . . .72 29. Second Declension, . . . . . .73 80. Third Declension, . . . . . .77 viii CONTENTS. BEOTION PAO» 31. Verbal Suffixes, .... . 79 32. Irregular or 'Weak Verbs, 82 33. Pe Nun Verbs, .... . 83 34. Pe Guttural Verbs, 85 35. Pe 'Aleph Verbs. Nouns Pe Guttural, . 86 36. 'Ayin Guttural Verbs and Nouns, . 88 37. Lamed Guttural Verb and Nouns, 90 38. "Lamed "Aleph Verbs and Nouns, r , 92 39. Pe Vav and Pe Yod Verbs, 95 40. 'Ayin Vav and "Ayin Yod Verbs, 98 41. Nouns 'Ayin Vav and Yod, 102 42. Double 'Ayin Verbs, 105 43. Nouns Double 'Ayin, 107 44. Tiamed He Verbs,- 110 45. Apocopated Forms and Nouns Lamed He, 113 46. The Verbal Forms Perfect and Imperfect, 118 47. The Adjective, Comparison, 121 48. The Numerals, ..... 123 49. Particles. Their Suffixes, 125 English-Hebrew Vocabulary, . 129 Hebrew-English Vocabulary, . 147 Paradigms of Verbs and Nouns, 164 Table of Irregular Nouns, 200 ADDITIONS. P. 26, after line 6, add : Rule far placing Metheg. — (1) The second full syllable from the Tone, if open, receives Metheg. (2) Before simple sheva the five long vowels aiu e o have Metheg ; and before a composite sheva all vowels have Metheg. On § 48, The Numerals, see the simplified statement. Syntax, p. 57, 06s. P. 144, Vocabulary, under U add : unless, 1^1^ (usually perf.). OF SOUNDS AND WRITING. § 1. HEBEEW ALPHABET. Name Form Sound and Sign Significa ' ion of the name Nlimeri- ral value ^A-leph Final X. - 5 Ox 1 Beth a . b, bh House 2 Gi'-mel :i g> gl^ Camel 3 Da-leth 1 d, db Door 4 He n , t 5 Wan{Vav) ■ i W, V Hook 6 Za-yin T z (in zero) Weapon 7 Heth n h Fence 8 Teth t: t (lingual) 9 Yodh / 1 ■ y Hand 10 Kaph X . s k, kb , Bent band 20 Ltt-medh b 1 Ox-go^d 30 Mem d a m Water 40 Nun 1- 3- n Fisb 50 Sa-mekh 0- s Prop 60 A-ym y « Eye 70 Pe ^ s - P. Pli Moutb 80 Ca-dhe r s- Q (ts or ss) 90 Qdph P' q (guttural k) 100 Resh 1- r Head 200 Sin, Shin iaia s, sb Tootb 300 Taw (Tav) n t, tb Sign or cross 1 400 2 § 1. HEBREW ALPHABET. 1. These 22 letters are all consonants Hebrew is written from right to left. 2. The letter k expresses simply the emission of the hreath. It may be well heard if in such words as ye'esoph, yo^omar, the stream of sound of the first vowel be suddenly shut off, and the second vowel uttered with a new emission of breath. The letter n had probably two sounds, one rough like ch in the Scotch word loch, and another a smooth deep sound of h very difficult to produce. The letter y had also two sounds, the one a sharp gut- tural sound, bearing the sime relation to K that n bears to the simple n, the other a vibratory palatal sound like the French r. These three letters, along with p, represent peculiar She- mitic sounds. 3. Six of the letters have a double pronunciation. Tho difference is indicated by a point in the bosom of the letter, thus : a J n 3 B n have the sounds bh (v), gh, dh (th in this), kh (ch in loch), ph, th (in think), but 3 a ^ &c. have the ord- inary soxmdiS oi b g d k p t. This point is called Daghesh(§ 7). 4. The letter i is sounded by most Scholars like m though some give it the sound of v. The Ungual sound B t is produced by pressing the flat of the tongue to the top of the mouth. The sign ^ Shin sounds sh; ^ Sin sounds s, and so D. 5. The five letters k m n p c^ have each two signs, of which the second is used when the letter is the last con- sonant of a word. All the finals except m have a tail coming below the line, and no other letter except qoph comes below the line. 6. The letters and signs in the column marked "sound and sign". Table p. 1, are those for the most part now adopted to represent the Hebrem letters, and should he employed in transliteration into English. ^ The sound of this letter was probably a strong flat ss; but the Alphabet has so many s sounds that the traditional ts may be retained for the sake of distinction. §1. VOWEL SOUNDS. VOWEL LETTERS. 3 Bern. a. On 2. The clear sound of ^ is represented in the Sept. l)y the spirites asper or lenis of the Greeks (the former of which is now generally adopted as the sign of the letter), and the gargling sound hy the letter 7. Cf. Gen. S. 8; 10. 21; 10. 19. It is decidedly wrong to represent either of its sounds by the nasal ng. Hem. h. Observe how the following letters are distinguished: 3 6 has a foot-stroke going behind, 3 A; is round and 3 n square, while J ^ is broken at the foot; *1 i is square at the top, and *1 r is round ; n h is open at the top, H Ix is shut, and T\ th has a foot at the left; ^ y does not touch the line, 1 w does, t z has a cross-stroke at the top, while ) final n comes under the line; Q s is round and D final m is square; t3 ^ is open at the top and D m open at the foot. EXERCISE. WRITE THE EOLLOWING IN ENGLISH AND HEBEEW. ,-jTijnn .riss .tisa ,05-1:1 ,ti:a-' ,^11 ,nKt ^^^^ ,r\'^ ,ni-i ,113 bh, b, 1, Im, ml, st, snn, Ikb, gdh, dgh, qvph, rg, kph, gv, hm, zyn, ms, mt, 'g, r', 'm, yvn, nvn, mym, 'vphph, hms, gyg, tmm. N.B. The forms hh, Ich&c. represent 3, 3 &o. without the dot; b, k &c. the dotted letters (No. 3). § 2. VOWEL SOTISrDS. VOWEL LETTERS. 1. Vowel Sounds. The three primary vowel sounds in Hebrew, as in other languages, are A I U (pronounced ah ee oo) which pass through the following modifications: l{ n A I TJ a i u (e,i) e a (6) A 1 e u 6 a e " a " e « 6 primary pure short vowels deflected short , G ( pure long vowels d I diphthongal long vowels extension of pure short to tone long extremest shortening of a vowel This table is not exhaustive, but it contains the main elements of the system. See the Rem. on p. 4. 1) Pure short vowels. The first line exhibits the three primary vowel sounds a i u; and the second line the de- flection of these into related short sounds. The vowel a passes many times into e, and then further into i. The sounds e o have now at least equal currency with i u. 1* 4 §2, VOWEL SOUNDS. TOWEL LETTERS. 2) Pure long vowels. The pure long vowels di u may be supposed to arise from the pure short by simple extension or duplication; or by short vowels coalescing with y, m, as iy=i, utv = u. The pure long d is less common than the others, d being often found instead of it. 3) Diphthongal long vowels. Another class of long vowels are the diphthongal, e 6, which have arisen from the vowel a coming before i and u, or before y and m, thus [ = ^ OJV I [ = 6. Hebrew hardly uses the diphthongs at and au (the sounds in buy and how), preferring, like English and French, the sounds i and d instead of them.' 4) Tone-long and indistinct vowels. The great strength of the Accent or Tone in Hebrew seems to affect short vowels in two ways: on the one hand it extends those in its im- mediate neighbourhood, giving rise to the vowels called tone-long a e o; and on the other hand it greatly shortens those at a distance from it, giving rise to a class of sounds, which, though vocalic, are too brief and indistinct to per- form the functions of real vowels. The commonest of these indistinct sounds is a very short indefinite sound, nearest perhaps to e in the syllable be of believe, — represented by the small * above the line;^ but others approach so much towards distinctness that their affinity to one or other of the three vowels a e o can be detected; they are a e 6. Bern. In the above Table the letters A I U indicate the three primary, generic vowel sounds, and the small letters the actual vowel sounds of the language. The notation adopted is convenient. The pure long and diphthongal vowels (both of which are unchangeable) are indicated by the circumflex, a &o. ; the tone-long vowels (which are changeable) by the long mark, d &c. ; the indistinct vowels by the short mark, a &o,; while the simple short vowels remain unmarked. 2. Vocalization. All the Shemitic Alphabets consisted originally of consonantal signs only (§ 1. 1). It is charac- teristic of their first efforts towards vocalization to make ' The sounds ay often combine into an open e with the tone, instead of forming the more extended ?. ^ The same sound is heard in German words beginning -with two conss., e. g. Imie i. e. k'nie. § 2. VOWEL SOUNDS. VOWEL LETTEBS. 5 use of certain feeble consonants to represent vowels, parti- cularly at the end of words. The various dialects differ considerably in the degrees of completeness to which they have developed this method of vocalization. 3. The consonants used in Hebrew for this purpose are M n N, which on account of this use have sometimes been called vorvel letters, thus: 1) The guttural, or a sound was indicated by the gut- tural letter Aleph, when not final (though indication of non-final a was rare), and sometimes when final. Final a was chiefly indicated by He. 2) The palatal, or i and e sounds were indicated by the weak palatal Yod. Final e was often indicated by He, but not final i. 3) The labial, or u and o sounds were indicated by the weak labial Vav. Final o was often indicated by He, but not final u. Briefly: i and e (medial and final) were represented by ^ u and (medial and final) 1 all finals (except i and u) n Kem. lu this textual vocalization, vowels of the Second class (i and e) and of the third class (m and o) were almost always indicated by the vowel letters, when final, less uniformly when medial; in the latter case they were often so indicated when diphthongal, also when pure long (So? it), but not when tone-long (e o), nor when short. Vowels of the first class (a sounds) were rarely indicated when not final, and not uniformly even when final.^ ^ See note 2, p. 8. — The above statements regarding the so-called voioel- letters are general; their use can hardly be understood without a know- ledge of the history of the language. 1. It is probable that they were used at first chiefly at the end of words, e.g. to mark pronominal suffixes (§ 19) and inflectional terminations, which were important for the sense. 2. In the middle of words they were chiefly used where w and t/ were elements of the word, e. g. formed diphthongs afterwards pronounced as vowels, or characterized the root (Ayin Vav and Yod verbs, § 40). 3. Later their use was extended to mark long vowels in general. — There is thus a great want of uniformity in the usage. In general they are most em- ployed towards the end of words, and when the same long vowel occurs twice in a word it is usually only once written fully. — The representation of final a by Aleph Is mostly late (usual in Aramaic), Num. 11. 20, Is. 19. 17, Ez. S7. 31 ; 31. 5 ; 36. 5, Bu. 1. 20, Lam. 3. 12, Ps. 127. 2, Dan. 11. 44. 6 § 3. EXTERNAL VOWEL SIGNS. THE MASSOEETIC POINTS. EXERCISE. WRITE THESE WORDS IN ENGLISH LETTERS: ,^bib ,na'ip .ib^ia /a^a ,^a ,-pb ,]^b ,'ib /b ,nb .na ,S3 ,irmbip ,bip ,niaK-i ."jn'^iin jti^otio .wmin .p-'rn .q'^to jii'bin ,^i^b^n .iffl^ain .rps Write these Hebrew words, expressing the vowels by vowel letters: shur, shor, shir, shirim, siis, susothenu, shatim, qoq, li, 16, lu, me, meshibh, moth, helil, hul, hila, §iph, meqig, tobhe, niri, hoshibhu, rin, holikh, helikhu, lule, meuiqothenu. § 3. EXTEENAL VOWEL SIGNS. THE MASSOEETIC POINTS. 1. So long as Hebrew was a living language, the helps to vocalization described in § 2. 3, though scanty, might be found sufficient. But when the language ceased to be spoken and became unfamiliar, fuller representation of the vowels was needful for correct reading. This necessity, in combination with the literary activity of the time, gave rise to the present very complete system of vowel signs. As the pronunciation of the language was not expressed by signs but handed down by tradition, this tradition became an important branch of study. The word for "tradition" is Massorah, under which term was embraced the whole Textual Criticism of the Scriptures, including the vocalization and reading. Hence those who employed themselves about this have been called Massoretes, and the new system of vowel signs introduced by them is named the Massoretic System of Points. The history of this system is difficult to trace. The names of its authors are quite unknown. So complicated and perfect a machinery of signs could have been matured only very slowly and by successive generations of labourers. The system probably dates from the sixth and following centuries; neither Jerome (d. 420) nor the Talmud (c. 500 A.D) appears to know anything of vowel signs. Being the result of a formal scientific effort to express the pronunciation of the language, it is, like all systems of vowel notation arising in similar circumstances, completely phonetic; the new signs, however, are not regarded as integral § 3. EXTERNAL VOWEL SIGNS. THE MASSOEETIC POINTS. 7 parts of the word and are not placed among the consonants, but, •with rare exceptions, beneath or above them, outside the word. The names given to the vowel signs probably have some reference to the action of the mouth in uttering the sounds. These sounds are contained in the first syllable of most of the names. The signs have probably all arisen by various modi- fications from the single point or dot. O pq EH «:• < % t. •< ^ '° f^ 2 o .9 fl CO •-! £ OS S a Z I- 1=- I- 1 = o > _ i 5 5>l =4-1 c3 «a !&« >st »J <4) ?> .h ■ <%> e*s. rfS- O, o '!3 1— * 1 .. 1 •■ 1 Is ' 1 a CO '« i-si *« 1 5; ^ & k "^ -S ■§• ompo orh -1, sone, hating. The figure fcs* will be sho at the be- ginning of a syllable, and os elsewhere, as laii' shd-mer, keeper; iJfsIR tir-pos, thou treadest.^ Rem. Besides the defects referred to in 2. 2) of this §, another defect in the Massoretio system is its failure to distinguish by sign ^ Ordinary consonants, however, were occasionally pronounced with -the opener sound of the hateph: 1. when a letter is repeated the sh'^va under the first is usually ha^. path, as Gen. 9. 14 ''iiS?3 lohen I bring a <:loud. Is. 1. 23. 2. After a long vowel, Gen. S. 12 3ilW and the gold, Gen. 3. 17 ; S7. 26. Also for euphonic reasons, Gen. 32. 18. Of. § 36. Rem. h for another case. ^ Final a is occasionally written defectively after n, thus JS? iT^^^i Gen. 41. 24, of. Gen. 19. 33. 36; 37. 7, Ex. 1. 18, 19, Ru. 1. 9, 12. The form )J?DB^ Gen. 4. 23 (Ex. 3. 20) is farther contracted. * "When holem precedes the letter K as a quiescent the point ia placed on the right apex of the letter, as N'3 ho, when it follows, the point is on the left apex, as aj< 'obh. When the N is not quiescent the holem occupies its proper places, as DISllS ho- dm. 10 § 4. COALITION OF THK MASS. AND TEXTUAL VOCALIZATION, the loDg a and short o, vowels cognate in quality but different in quantity. By attending to the rules for the syllable (§ 5) and for Metheg (§ 10. 2), the learner will generally know for which of the two sounds the sign stands in any place. — 1. The rules for the syll. (§ 5) shew that where -;- stands in a. shut unaccented syll. it is o, as DjJM vay-ya-qom, and he arose, DJjr!"?3 kol-ha-'am, all the people (§10.4), b^'»"\'^fi Hsh-bor-'olchel, Gen.43.'7. 2. The rules for Metheg (§ 10) shew that H^sn is hokh-mah, wisdom, (HlSSn hd-kh^mah, she is wise) &c. 3. Only a knowledge of forms will teach that DSB is po-'olo, his work, cf. § 29 with § 36 and § 81. The Jewish Grammarians maintain that -^ in such instances is a, but contrary to the analogy of the forms in the regular strong root (see Baer-Del. Job pref. p. vi). EXERCISE : TRANSLITEEATE THE FOLLOWING HEBREW WORDS INTO ENGLISH, AND ENGLISH INTO HEBREW WITH MASS. VOWELS. ,bbK .cip ,Ys ,'±\ ,?ja ,tb: ,&!« .qjj .Wtb ,b? ,Da ,pn .-jn ,^t ■ ',r\m .in-n ,11 .bsri .yJi-i ,yn ,D]5 .os'tu'/tds'i ,'^m. ,pTn gam, gobh, bor, bosh, shur, shir, shor, sham, h5q, 'im, 'im, noph, "^am, bar, robh, rug, harogh, gel, mashal, m'shal, qotel, yarug, qomam, yo'omar, 'esoph. § 4. COALITION OF THE MASSOEETIC AND TEXTUAL VOCALIZATION. The Massoretes are supposed to have abstained from any alteration of the written consonantal text. The rud- imentary vowel system expressed by the vowel letters re- mained untouched. At the same time their own system was not a mere supplement to this but a thing complete in itself. It thus happens that in all those cases where a textual vowel already existed, there is now a double vocalization, the textual and the Massoretic. When the consonantal letter is present the syllable is said to be written fully (scriptio plena), when it is absent the syllable is written defectively. See also § 9. Rem. When vowels are written fully the Massoretic point stands in its proper place under the consonant which it follows, except holem which is placed over the vav, e. g. ]^3 Mn, yi bin, ]13 63m. Exercise. Write the words in Exercise § 2 with the Masso- retic as well as Textual vowels. § 5. PKINCIPLES OP THE SYLLABLE. BEADING. 1 1 § 5. PRINCIPLES OP THE SYLLABLE. READING. 1. Hebrew is a strongly accented speech, and the Accent or Tone to a great extent rules the various vowel changes in the language. The accent usually falls on the last syllable of the word; in certain cases it may fall on the penult.^ 2. Kinds of syllable. A syllable ending in a vowel is called open, as ^ qd; one ending in a consonant is called shut, as bp_ qcil. Every syllable must contain a vowel, and the sh^vas or indistinct s6unds are not sufficiently vocalic to form syllables. 3. Vowel of the syllable. The vowel of an open syllable is long ; it may be short if it has the accent, as nbaip qd-te-leih. The vowel of a shut syllable is short; it may be long if it has the accent, as ^B]?a miq-tal.^ 4. Another kind of syllable, not uncommon, is the half open. It has a short unaccented vowel, but the consonant that would naturally close it is pronounced with a slight vowel sound after it, and thus hangs loosely between this* syllable and the one following, e. g. ^bj?? biqtol, in killing; which is not biq-tol nor bi-q'tol. Half open syllables are generally the result of inflectional changes or composition (§ 6. 2 d). 5. Beginning of the syllable. Every syllable must begin with a consonant. No syllable can begin with more than two consonants. When a syllable begins with two con- sonants these must be separated by the slight vocalic sound indicated by sh°va simple or composite, which is placed under the first, as ^Bp q'tal, la'^rj halo-mi, my dream. Thus the place of sh'va vocal, simple or composite, is under the first of two consonants that begin a syllable. ^ It is understood that the tone or accent is the stress of the voice, and the tone-syllable is the syllable of the word on which the stress falls, e. g. in the noun present the first syllable is the tone-syllable, in the verb to preslnt, the last syll. has the tone. ^ Observe that we speak of long and short vowels in Heb., but not of long and short syllables; the syllable is shut or open. 12 §5. PRINCIPLES OF THE SYLLABLE. BEADING. G. End of the syllable. A syllable may end in a vowel or consonant, that is be either open or shut (No. 2). None but a final syllable can end in more than one consonant; and a final in not more than two, and the two cannot be a double letter. Simple sh'va silent is placed under the consonant that ends the syllable, if the consonant be sounded and not the last letter of a word, as ^Bpo miq-tal. A consonant not sounded (i. e. quiescent) does not take sh'va^ as r^E^KT re-sMth; nor yet a single final consonant, except kaph which takes sh^va in its bosom, as DB' sham, but 'sjb lakh; but two sounded consonants at the end of a word both take sh'va, as BB'p qosht, "QVi), yashq. Rule for placing Sh'va. The rules in 5 and 6 regarding sh^va (simple and composite alike) may be put briefly thus: Sh'va (simple or composite) is to he placed under every con- sonant without a full vowel of its own, if the consonant be sounded (not quiescent) and not the single final letter of a word. When two consonants end a word, the last has sh°va only when the first has it (by first part of the rule), as BtJ^p qosht, but nKljjb liq-rath. Bern. a. On 1. If the accent be on the penult, either the un- accented final or accented penult must be open. Bern. b. On 3. The vowels t and H cannot stand in a shut syl- lable before two consonants even with the accent. On the other hand the secondary accent Metheg (§ 10. 2) has the same effect on the syl- lable as the main accent.^ Bem. c. On 6. There is one case of a syllable beginning with a vowel, when the conjunction vav is pointed ^ (§ 15). But Shemitio shews a tendency to pronounce w y ss u i even at the beginning of words. Bem. d. On 6. A double letter falling at the end of a word be- comes single. This arises from the strictly phonetic character of the vocalization (see § 7. 3. Bem.), a true double letter necessarily re- quiring a vowel after it. There are perhaps a pair of exceptions, flK thou fern. (§ 12) and Rnj thou (f.) hast given. Prom the last part of the above rule is excepted according to some Edd. 2 fern. perf. of verbs N"^ and H"^, e. g. TpJ^ 2 Sam. 14, 2, 1 K. ^ On short vowel before gutturals see § 8. 4 Bem. § 6. THE VOWEL SYSTEM AND THE TONE. 13 17. 13, Ez. 5. 11. In a, few words, e. g. t pi n N are called gutturals. They might be called spiritals, being strictly breathings. The j? is a firmer sound of the same kind as N, and n a firmer sound of the same kind as n. The last two are much stronger letters than the other two. Being but breathings these letters approach a good deal towards vowels, and this feebleness in consonantal power causes the following pe- culiarities : 1. The gutturals prefer about them, particularly before them, the guttural or a vowels, and a final guttural must be preceded by pathah or qamec. Pathah furtive. Any short vowel before a final guttural becomes pathah; and between any long vowel (other than qameQ) and the final guttural there steals in, in utterance, the sound of short a. This short a is therefore called path. furtive. Thus ^^d but n^D; '^^^E'lT but nibE'n hish-U'dh. 2. The gutturals cannot take simple sh'va vocal, they require the composite shVas; in many cases they dislike simple sh'va silent, preferring the composite, e. g. Tijp but Tij> ; ■hT\ but ■hv;^. 3. A guttural letter points itself and the consonant preceding: — that is a guttural with a hateph turns a pre- ceding simple sh'va vocal into the short vowel corresponding to the hateph; e. g. "tisb becomes *iiJ>b. 4. The gutturals cannot be doubled. In this peculiarity resh agrees with the gutturals. Hence the short vowel that would precede the guttural were it doubled (§ 7. 3 Rem.) falls into an open syllable before the undoubled letter aud becomes the corresponding tone long vowel (§ 5. 3 ; § 6. 22 § 8. THE GUTTURALS. Table & c) ; e. g. iMn hak-Mihedh but lajjn hd-dhhedh, ^W but B^"iB*, ^ajj but ^nii. Eem. a. On 1. The sharp vowels i, u, falling before gutturals not final, are generally depressed to e, o, as nearer the a sound (§6.3 Table d). The depression happens less regularly when the vowels follow the gutt. ; e. g. bm) for ^'in';; nbjJJ for nbaj?. The letter K (being a quiescent also, see § 9. 1 Eem. a) is excepted from this rule. The letter "1 often agrees with J?nrT in desiring patJiah before it when final, but it is not subject to the rule oi path, furtive. The sign of path, furtive is written under the final gutt., but the sound is heard before it, as IVT] riJtah, spirit. Path, furtive is not counted as a vowel, and, of course, disappears when the gutt. ceases to be final; e. g. IJw^i} has only two vowels, i and t; its fern, is TVrb^n. So '"rHI my spirit. Eem. 6. On 2. By far the most common hateph is ^^. Initial S is fond of ^ immediately before the tone, but at a distance from the tone it reverts to — , as 'bt< but DS'^S. The hateph that takes the place of silent sh'va always corres- ponds to the preceding short vowel, as ^b^3 (for ''^y3). The second half of the rule applies chiefly to syllables not in the tone, and the process is facilitated by the law stated in Eem. a whereby the gutt. depresses i w to e o, e. g. "10N3 = lONi = 1?^3' This softer enunciation shews itself chiefly with the weak gutturals J? S, the harder PI H often retain the simple sh'va silent. Eem. c. On 3. This rule and the second half of rule 2 really go together and might be compressed into one in the words of the old grammars : "littera gutturalis punctat se et praecedentem" et vice versa. The words vice versa form the second half of rule 2. Eule 3 applies greatly to prefixes, e. g. nx"? = i1«^ to a lion. Eem. d. On 4. As the cause that produces the tone-long in this case is permanent, the vowel is unchangeable. Before the stronger gutt. n n, the short vowel is very often retained, and sometimes even before the weaker J? N. To prevent the special emphasis of the short vowel in this case § 9. THE QUIESCENT LETTEBS. 23 from being neglected it is often marked by Metheg (Eem. d p. 17).^ In a few cases "1 takes Dag. forte, e. g. 1 Sam. 1. 6; 10. 24; 17. 25. Prov. 3. 8; 14. 10; (?U. 21; 15. 1). Song 5. 2. Jar. 39. 12. Ezek. 16. 4. Otherwise the vowel is uniformly- prolonged before it. This probably points to a double way of pronouncing the resh. EXEECISE: CORRECT THE FOLLOWING WORDS. ,^bnb rm). ,i^a5*3 .^lasia ,p^Tnn .D^-niD ,t]^:a ,T|Ert': ,vy) § 9. THE QTJIESCENT LETTERS. The letters 1 1 n N shew the same kind of feebleness that the letters h w y, that correspond to three of them, have in English: they frequently coalesce in various ways with the vowel sounds about them.^ 1. They are real consonants at the beginning of a syl- lable , but at the end of a syllable after a full vowel they generally surrender their consonantal power and are silent; e. g. nos 'd-mar, but "lax"' yo-mar; la-; y'me, but 1)313 M-me. They do not modify the sound of the vowel before them when silent, though it is often lengthened, particularly if it be of the first or third class. Sh'va is not placed under the silent consonant (§ 5. 6). Rem. a. The letter K may be silent after any vowel sound, either medial or final. ■^ When the short vowel remains before the gutt., Dag. forte is then, in the language of many Grammarians, said to be implied in the gutt. {Dag. forte impUeitum). The punctuation, however, appears to treat the short vowel as forming an open syll., Is. 1. 4 ^3Ki they despise. Zeph. 1. 17 Dil.lJ?! as the blind. In a few instances, where characteristic duplication is not omitted, the strong gutt. admits a short vowel before it, e. g. ins one, IHS, pi. DnntJ other, in»(?) swift, Om^ brothers. ^ The facts stated in 1 suffice for the exercise; 2, 3, 4 had better be passed over and read only when referred to. 24 § 9. THE QUIESCENT LETTEKS. The letter n is silent perhaps in a pair of cases when medial, and when final is the mere sign of a vowel sovind (§ 2. 3). Eem. b. The letter 1 is silent after the o and u sounds (third class), and generally after the a sound (first class), with which it coalesces and forms the diphthongal 3 (§ 2. 1. 3)). In a few cases 1 is consonantal after the a sound, as IS gav. The sufflosal form 11-;- is sounded dv (§ 19), as 1''D?D sH-sdv. After vowels of the second class (t, e) 1 is sounded, as 11 ziv. The letter "i is silent after the i and e sounds (second class), and generally after the a sound, with which it unites to form the diphthongal e (§ 2. 1. 3)). In a few cases '' is consonantal after a, as in the suffixal form "^ (pausal ^-7-), which is sounded ay (dee), as ^D?D, sO-sdee (§ 19). After vowels of third class (0, m), ' is sounded, as ^IH hoy (IiSee), ^V>i gdluy (ffd-loo-ee). 2. Even at the beginning of a syllable immediately after a consonant these letters can hardly maintain themselves: they generally surrender their vowel to the preceding vowelless consonant, and quiesce after the vowel which they have given up, or even fall out of the form altogether, thus yaqwim=i/a-qtm, yaqwum=ya-qum, hushwab=hu-shab, yehaqtil= yaqtil, r''dshim=rd'shim. 3. When the letters w y stand between two vowels they many times are lost in the vowel stream surrounding them; they disappear and the two vowels are represented by that one which being characteristic of the form was the stronger, which is generally the latter of the two ; or the two vowels coalesce and form a new sound. Thus, qau;am=gdm, maweth=meth, qaioum=qum. So h sometimes, susahu=suso. 4. One of the weak letters to y may be changed into another under the influence of a strong preceding characteristic vowel resolved to maintain itself: the weak letter passes into another homogeneous to the vowel, yivrash=yiyrash=yi-rash. EXEECISE: PRONOUNCE AND WBITE OUT IN SYLLABLES THESE WORDS. .^'la ,*ix| .Wxns ,ato^: .snbis ,m^ ,«b ,bx .r^nip ,n:ii»a ,bx?52iB: ,nx-i]3b ,nijnK ,K^bi5 '^^^^^ '^'1 >t^'i?i<']^ ,^!iD3 ,rt:»b^ ,>ini^^Dp^ .ni^bsn .ra^si ,n'abTB .D^tibs ,"5^i<\a :in:p ,^bsib .ni^bs .iwsi p^m^ ^s^h, ip, ''ia .ibiD § 10. THE ACCENTS. METHEG &o. PAUSE. 25 §10. THE ACCENTS. METHEG &c. PAUSE. 1. Use of the Accents. The accents have three uses: 1) they mark the tone-syllahle ; 2) they are signs of logical interpunction, like our comma &c. ; and 3) they are musical expressions. In the first case they are guides to the pronun- ciation of the individual words; in the second they are guides to the sense, being a kind of commentary ; and in the third they are guides to the proper reading of the text as a whole, which is a kind of recitative or cantillation. The last use, of course, embraces the other two. 2. The secondary accent (Metheg) and the Tone. The main accent or Tone falls generally upon the last syllable of the word (§ 5. 1) ; in one class of nouns (the Segholates § 29), and in some Verbal forms, it falls on the penult.^ a) According to the natural rhythm of the language the syllable immediately before the Tone has a fall, but the syllable second from the Tone a certain emphasis or ac- centual rise. To prevent this emphasis or anti-tone being neglected the syllable was often marked by a sign called Metheg (bridle), a small perpendicular stroke. An open syllable was most apt to be hurried over, and hence: the second full syllable from the Tone, if open, is uniformly marked by Metheg, as ibi«, h"l3t1, D^nn. b) When the tone syllable begins with two consonants, the indistinct vowel under the first is strong enough to bear the accentual fall, and the preceding open syllable is marked with Metheg, n^"3« 'd-kh"ldh, she ate. In such positions Metheg indicates that the shVa is vocal, and thus serves ^ Of the accentual signs some stand above, and some below the word; ■when above, the sign stands upon the initial cons, of the accented syll., as W'h; when below, it stands after the vowel of the syll., as Q^D, except in the case of holem, and shureq, when it is placed under the conson., as QV, nn. When the accented syll. begins with two conss. the sign is put on the second. A few signs are restricted to particular positions, such as the initial or final letter of a word, and do not indicate the Tone syll. For more information en these and other points see my Outlines of Hebrew Accentuation. 26 § 10. THE ACCENTS. METHEG &o. PAUSE. to distinguish between a and o, and between i and i, and u and m; e. g. nblj ' okh-lah, food; ?NT «/2-r'''M, ^Aey mill fear; ^NT yir-'u, they will see. if the vocal shVa in this case be a hateph, the preceding vowel though s^or^ has that distinctness that requires to be preserved by Metheg, IB'kV. c) If the second from the Tone be a shut syll., it will be pronounced with sufficient distinctness without the aid of Metheg ; in such a case, if there be an open syll. farther from the Tone, this is felt to require Metheg to prevent too hurried utterance, as paVnei Gen. 4. 4; Ezek. 42. 5. d) If the word be long the Metheg already placed may be taken as a new tone, and another Metheg may fall two syllables from it, as ni313''nna!| Ezek. 42. 5. The conjunction ^ and, being a weak sound, very rarely takes Metheg.^ ^ The above rules give the main facts about Metheg. The results of a very full investigation into the Massoretic laws of Metheg have been given out by S. Baer in two Articles on Metheg-Setzung in Merx's Archiv i,u, 1869. According to Baer Metheg is of three kinds; first, light, — the object of which is to secure to vowels their full breadth of sound; second, heavy, — the object of which is to ensure to a syllable its special emphasis; third, articulative, — the object of which is to ensure that a consonant be enunciated distinctly and not run into another. Again, light M. is of two kinds; first, ordinary — placed on the second syll. from the Tone, if the syll. be open, i. e. not followed by Dag. forte nor any Sh^va. See the exx. above in No. 2, o. To this ordinary M. apphes what is said above in 2, a. Second, stationary (feststehend) — placed on the five long vowels (§ 6, Tab. a) when followed by simple Sh'va, and on all vowels, long or short, when followed by a composite Sh'va. This M. is called stationary because it is invariably placed on such syllables and is independent of the place of Tone. To this M applies in general what is said above in 2, b. But here Baer deviates from the ordinary doctrine of the Syll. (§ 5. 3, with which goes the doctrine of the Aspirates § 7. 2), maintaining that the sh'va after the long vowels is silent and the Syll. shut, e. g. riTbK is to he read 'dkh-ldh, niipIO tol-dhoth. Examples of heavy M. occur in the case of the Art. when its Dag. is omitted (§ 11. Eem. a); with the H of Interrogation (§ 49. comp. Bern, d p. 17). This M. may stand on simple sh'va, c. g. Hjjnii Ps. 2. 3. Examples of the articulative M. in Gen. 28. 2 &o., Q"1N Hi^.B- These laws are not observed in printed Edd. but are followed in Baer's Ed. of Genesis, Psalms, and Isaiah, &c. § 10. THE ACCENTS. METHEG &o. PAUSE. 27 3. The Accentual system. The Accentual system is very intri- cate and in some parts obscure. A brief outline of its uses as a means of interpunction will here suffice: — a) The text is broken into verses, P^sHqim, and the end of each Pdsuq is marked by the sign S, called Soph pasuq (end of the verse). The accent on the final word is called SiUHq, its sign being like Metheg. IV^Hn Gen. 1. 1. I V IT T b) The greatest logical pause within the verse is indicated by a sign called 'Athndh "breathing", or "rest". Jp«n n\n'^N Gen. 1. 1. c) If there be two great pauses in the verse the greatest or one next the end of the verse is marked by Athnah, and the one nearer the beginning of the verse by sign called S^goltd, as, M3 V:mk J!^i?in....Gen.l.7. d) If the clause of words lying between Silluq and Athnah, or between Athnah and Segolta, or between Athnah and the be- ginning of the verse, Segolta being absent, requires to be divided by a pretty large pause, this is in all these cases marked by a sign called Zdqeph qdton, resembling simple sh'va placed over the word,^ as tn'^Kh ^•'^ao D-'an wf-ha Gen. i. 6. •IT T • I - 'AT - ■ « e) A distinctive of less power than Zakeph is Tiphha, which marks a pause which the rhythm requires as a preliminary to the great pauses indicated by Silluq and Athnah. Its sign is a line bent backwards, as :p«n n^OB'n dn'j'^s r/^^^l^ ■ . • Gen. 1. 1. f) These are the main distinctive accents, and by stopping at them, as at the points in modern languages, the reader will do justice to the sense. There are several more distinctives of lesser force. There is also a number of conjunctive accents or Servants, as they are called, to the disjunctives, accents which are placed on the words that stand immediately before and in close relation with those on which distinctives are placed. It would seem to follow ^ The sign " called z. gd'lhol, of the same distinctive power, is used when its word is the only word in the accentual clause. 28 § 10. THE ACCENTS. METHEG &c. PAUSE. from the variety of the conjunctive signs that they had musical significance, otherwise one connective might have served all distinctives alike. The two most common conjunctives are Merkha —^, which serves ^illuq and Tiphha, and Mundh —^, which serves 'Athnah and Zaqeph. See Gen. 1. 1,2. g) The books Job, Proverbs and Psalms have an accentuation in some respects different from that of the other books, called the Poetical. The end of the verse is marked as in Prose by SUluq and Soph pa?uq; also the great distinction next the end by Athnah ; but this is not the greatest distinction in the verse, which is that next the beginning, marked by a sign called Merkha Mahpakh or 'Ole v'yoredh, thus :3B'; nioj; ^""VM^ Ps. 1. 1. 4. Maqqeph (binder). Part of the accentual or rhyth- mical machinery is the Maqqeph or hyphen, which binds two or more words together. The sign indicates that all the words so joined are pronounced in the rhythmical reading as one word. The occurrence of two accented syl- lables in immediate succession is contrary to the rhythm, and this conjunction is avoided by throwing several words into one. All the words joined by Maqqeph lose their ac- cents except the last, and in consequence of this their long vowels, if changeable, become short (§ 5. 3), n^n te but DJ>ri"^3, all the people} 5. Pause. The great pauses just described (in 3) are naturally accompanied with certain changes upon the ordin- ary vocalization. In general only the two greatest Prose accents (viz. ^illuq —^, marking the end, and ^Athnah , marking the middle of the verse), and the three greatest of the Poetical, throw vowels into pause. The effects are mostly as follows: a) A short vowel in the tone becomes long, as xS'b, pause D"d; and if the short vowel had been modified from another it is the long of the primary sound that appears, ny p- m- ^ tlnchaDgeably long vowels are usually marked by Metheg, as "h'ViVi Sh&th'li. ' " § 10. THE ACCENTS. METHEG &o. PAUSE. 29 b) Occasionally the tone is shifted from the last syllable to the penult, which is lengthened if it was short, nfiji p. nA§. c) Perhaps the commonest pausal effect is what looks like a combination of a b. In verbal foritis with vocal sh°va before the tone, this sh°va becomes the tone long of the primary sound whose place it had taken, and the tone is then shifted to it, as T\l^^ she dwelt, p. r\ib^, from ptj^; noj? stand ye, p. snbj? from ibg. A few nominal forms follow the same method (see § 45). Bern. SVva before the suffix Jcha becomes &, 1D1D p. •JolD. In some cases the weight of the Pause doubles the consonant, I^^IT Judg. 5. 7 ; there is also a fondness shewn in many cases for the sharp d in pausal syllables. 6. O'rz and K'thibh (read, written). The K'tMbh is the consonantal text as it lay before the punctuators, being held inviolable. When however for any reason, whether of grammar or propriety, the punctuators preferred another reading, the vowels of this reading were put under the K'thibh in the text, while the consonants, which could not find a place in the text, were set in the margin. This re- commended reading is the Q'H. Attention is called to the Margin by a small circle placed over the K'thihh, thus: ^Van Gen. 24. 14, — which means that for the (mas.) form "Ijjan of the text the form JTlSSn {fern.) is to be read. OF WORDS AND FORMS. Roots may be considered to be of three classes: firsty the simplest and instinctive interjection, expressive of mere feeling, as ah! second, the higher demonstrative, expressing locality, direction, and distinction between one object and another; and third, roots embodying thoughts, nouns and verbs. The first class, being uninflected and individual, do not need any separate treatment. And of the others it is better to begin with the second, which is next in simplicity. 30 § 11. THE ABTICLE. § 11. THE ARTICLE. Hebrew has no indefinite Article, though the numeral one, particularly as the language declined, began to be used with the feebleness of an Article. The Definite Article, properly a demonstrative pronoun, is ^rj. This is an inseparable particle, prefixed to words; and, -like the in English, suffers no change for Gender or Number. PARADIGM OP THE ARTICLE. Before ordinary conss. — Tf, ^Ijsn Before gutturals { ' J ' I ^ " i Before gutturals 0. JJ -0. -0, ''03^0 with qamec | •' '' '' ^j^l rt) The I of the Art. is not written, but assimilated to the next consonant, which is thus doubled, as bip voice, ^1p!i the voice. V) Before gutturals (which cannot be doubled), \\iepathah of the Art., falling in an open Syllable, expands to qamec (§ 8. 4), as tS'''Nri the man. This expansion is universal be- fore K and 1, and general before y. Before the strong gutt. n and n, pathah usually remains (§ 8. Rem. d). c) The rule in &) applies to k and "i with any vowel. But when n, J>, n are pointed with qamep, the punctuation of the Art. varies: — Before and j> in the Tone, the Art,, falling in the pretone, takes a (§ 6. 2b), as "ihrt, the mountain, Dj^rj, the people. Before ("j, j; not in the Tone, the Art., falling before the pretone, retains the short vowel (comp. § 6. 2 c), which by a law of euphony becomes e {fghol), as D^'inn, the mountains ; bbMi}i the trouble. Before n (ha) in all positions the Art. takes s'ghol, and also before 0, D3nn, the wise, ann, the feast. Bern. a. Not unfrequently a softer pronunciation omits theDaghesh from letters pointed with Sh'va, by § 7 Note a. The somewhat great § 12. THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 31 emphasis of such a syllable, which still remains, is many times marked by Metheg, as IBDCH Is. 40. 20. Metheg is not put before \ nor yet immediately before the Tone. Bern. 6. The hal is 'al in Arabic (though the Bedawin are said to pronounce hal), as 'Al-Qor'dn. Perhaps this form is seen Gen. 10. 26. man E^'^St woman ilB'K morning "lj?3 day UV night tM light niN darkness "ij^fi firmament JJ^pT dust IBJJ water, waters U\b pi great bTii good 21D high DT upon "h^l and ] The conjunction and is a particle inseparably prefixed to words, IS'''K1 and a man. To day Wn A good man 310 ^•'» The man 1 tS''««n 31tS not i^ how! JIB unto "^S Bern. The root of the verb is 3. s. yer/". e. g. Ae creaied, he took, not the i»/Sn. !Z%is is the man B'^KH HI TAis is the good man 2113(1 tS^'Nil flt 2%is ^oorf maw mn Sllsn tf-il^^ Rule 1. The demonstratives this, that may be pronouns or adjectives. When pronouns they do not take the Art., and the order is as in English. When they are adjectives, their noun is definite, and they conform to Rule 1 § 11. With another adj. the demons, stands last. TOe boy heard lh\n j;»B> The boy did not hear 1^>n j;»B' tih The boy did not hear the voice 51j?nTIN „ „ „ Rule 2. The nominative, unless emphatic, usually follows the verb."^ Rule 3. The definite accus. in nouns and pronouns vyhen directly governed by an active verb is usually preceded by the particle flS.^ Rule 4. The negative stands immediately before the verb or predicate. 1 Sentences are of two kinds, verbal — having a finite verb for pred- icate ; and nominal — having any other kind of predicate. The order in a verbal sentence is verb, subject; in a nominal, subject, predicate (cf. the excep. § 11 Eule 2). 2 The pron. mah "what" does not take flN. § 14. THE INSEPAKABLE PREPOSITIONS. 35 EXEHCISE. TBANSLATE. rws "ITT!!); Di*n ni 4 iK^inn nb";^n 3 '.n'sn •'a 2 lonx 153 jbipn-ns 5>a^ itix ibjn nt 6 \r\rn ci^isyir! Dyn 5 :D^rfb}< -ic« TB-'itn ssi 9 nssn-bs tibxin stb'' 8 :nbK-m ib'' "a 7 V -: • T T T T V ~ I V V ~ "T ^ V •• ■• ' — f ■ Qfl^s* «:;a 11 'nin Di^n nimia 10 :y^Nn-b? d^an ?;sti :nTbn ti^ixn "a u ja^inn-nx tiban npb 13 jrrin"* Who are these? What are ye? Who is yonder woman? I am the great king who is over (upon) the land. That day. This is a good head. This is the good head. This head is good. This good head. This is the bad boy who spilt the water upon the earth. This woman. What has the man done? This mountain is very lofty. What are these? These are the heavens and the earth which God created this day. This is the wise king. That^ sore disease. He sat by (upon) those waters. How great is that palace ! § 14. THE INSEPAEAELE PEEPOSITIONS. 1. Prepositions and similar words in Hebrew are usually nouns, sometimes entire, but oftener worn down and frag- mentary. The following three fragments used as prepo- sitions are, like the Art., inseparably prefixed to words: a in, by, with; local and instrumental 3 as, like h to, at, for; sign of dat. and infin. a) The usual pointing of these light fragments is simple sh^va. b) Before another sh°va this becomes hireq, by § 6. 2 d., forming a half open syllable, n?V, 33b3. c) Before a hateph the sh^va becomes the corresponding short vowel, by § 8. 3, n.K, ■''!N3=^"1«3, ^i/ce a lion. d) Before the accent, the prep., falling in the prelone, often has tone-long qamec (§ 6. 2 b.), as whh to water. ^ For this name the reader substituted ''i'lX Lord, the vowels of which stand in the text. Possibly the word was pronounced HJiT Yaih-veh. ^ In siwy. N^nn, in plwr. tirti}. 36 § 14. THE INSEPARABLE PREPOSITIONS. e) In words with the Art. the weak He usually surrenders its vowel to the prep, and disappears, by § 9. 2., DJjn, D^^ to the people} 2. The short word ]B used as a prep, in the sense of from, out of, is also a worn down noun and generally used as an inseparable particle. a) The weak liquid n, as in other languages, is assi- milated to the next consonant, which is doubled, D'SD from water (as im-moveahle). b) Before gutturals, the short vowel expands in the open syllable into the corresponding tone-long, ]>j?o from a tree, by § 8. 4.; and occasionally hireq remains by § 8. 4. Rem. c) Before the Art. either 6) is followed; or oftener the prep, is prefixed entire to the word with help of Maqqeph, yj?("J» or I'X'TIP from the tree. Bern. The prep, is occasionally found entire in other cases. book IBB garden I? place DipO ground nai« dry land T^'Sl beast, cattle nana lion ^1S ass "won work nsN^o seventh 'T^^ holy vlvi to write an? to give m to eat ^3« to rest T\yi^ to rule over to destroy to blot out -„«. to cry ""^^-unto EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. Q^rib^ rata 2 srib-jb x'^ij ^i^nbi B,i^ -li^b D^ribs s*;]? |- TTiT -T' TT V-: tt:-i" '";- - nna e :n-Tn Dipaa ib^n 'ytt^ 5 :ds2i ■nban 'bwz 4 :-,aa T T V - I T - WV - -T T T I V V - " T If- " v: T T T ■• ; - ; t t i" t t v -: v t ; {bs-'na x^n Q-'nbxn s :naixrTp iss Dnxn-nx T •• r • v: IT T T -I IT I • T T T T rr * The n sometimes remains, particularly after 3, and in the declining:^ stages of the language. § 15. THE CONJUNCTION &o. 37 To a lion. The man wrote in the book. God gave the woman to the man for wife. In the morning. In these heavens. In the earth. In that day. In the lofty palace. The lion cried like an (the) ass. God called the firmament heaven, and the dry land called he earth. He gave the sword to the king. Man is dust out of the ground. He ate of the tree. The wise people rested on the seventh day. To the dust. In (at) pain. On (in) the high mountain. § 15. THE CONJUNCTION &c. 1. The inseparable conjunction i and is pointed very- much like the inseparable prepositions in § 14. a) Its ordinary pointing is sh*va, njjKI and thou. b) Before the hatephs it takes the corresponding short vowel (§ 8. 3.), ^iK5 and I. c) Before simple sh^va and the Labials 0013) its point- ing is \, ]5!| and a son. d) Before the accent, especially if disjunctive, it often takes qamec (§ 6. 2 b.), } J?"!) and evil Gen. 3. 5. Bem. Before yod with sh'va the pointing is hireq after § 6. 2d., and yod U silent (§ 9. 1), ^fi^l and the days of—. Even before a labial,"^ the law d) of the pretone may prevail, as ^PlSl, Gen. 1. 2. Naturally the coDJ. does not cohere so closely with the word as the prep, and does not displace the Me of the Art., as DJjni and the people, 2. The verb. The root of the verb is held to be 3. sing, perf. act., which is the simplest form. Verbal inflection for persons is made by^attaching to this root the significant elements of the personal pronouns (§ 12). Z.sing.mas.perf. he ruled, has ruled &c. h^ 2. „ „ „ thou hast ruled &c. ri^Ef» iTfl of pr. fAow 2. „ fern. „ thou hast ruled &c. P^B^O t « » 1. „ com. „ I ruled, have ruled &c. ipbfD to go down Ti; to keep *1I?B^ to review Ij^S EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. lAT^ rmb b:5-nK^ ni'j npb 2 n^tn ^a^ Dsn nn^ ^ iD1»TB «b 4 jD-'p'^'n^ on Dsn "si-^ns 3 :b5TB nnits n^» jtjban 'r\5Si?3 "iton ntos 5 jb»'iip:=' ^rjb» n;"n^ trm V^su-bi ^nb» nhsi: nbK 7 jpiibn »b nln": nninaii g J V T T T " v: : • V ■• T ; T T T . ; jD^aifin nim-i ysn^a*! Tvs^ ^ns^i^a* biia bji »s 9 liaa Ts^K na ynijn nsbasi 11 :*ian yr^M ^^i» 10 asnn "lis "3 na-'^sa ii" cj^axi V"'!''^ ^3>"i rr-n 12 sbTi TTt "T * TJ"*;" ™T T;~JIvtT TT TT "T ^ Abigail. ^ Israel. * Dag. in kaph only in cons. * Observe the pausal vowels in 6, 9, 10, 1 1. The great day of the Lord. The day of the Lord is great. The good queen of the land. All the people of the earth. All the king's good asses. The captain (prince) reviewed all the mighty- men (heroes) of valour and all the people of war. In the two- sides of the temple. I have gone northward. We are gone down to-hades (Sh°'61). He went towards-the-mountain. We slew the ' The adj. agrees with its ooun in gend. and numb, but not in state. The cons, is eaphonio as well as syntactical and mast be foUowed immediately by the word to which it subordinates itself. § 18. THE FIRST DECLENSION. 45 man's ass. The people did not drink from the waters of the rivers for they were hlood.^ The law of the lord is good. Thou hast not kept the commandments of the God of all the earth. The spirit of Grod was upon the waters. God of the spirits that belong to all flesh. I have broken down all the walls of the city. Thou hast kept the poor of the land from all ill. Thou hast eaten of the tree of the garden. ' In dependent clauses with ^3 for, that &o. the pronoun is put last. § 18. THE PIEST DECLENSION.* Nouns may be arranged in Declensions according to the internal vowel changes produced by alteration in tho place of Tone occasioned by Inflexion (§ 16. 2). Many forms of Nouns, however, contain unchangeable vowels, i. e. vowels pure long, or diphthongal, or unchangeable from position, as 113J (gibbor), a hero, ]liaN ^ebh-ybti), poor, in both of which the first vowel is unchangeable by po- sition, and the second pure long, and consequently un- changeable by nature (§ 6. 1). Such Nouns, as they suffer no internal change from inflexion, do not seem to require classification; they are indeclinable.* The forms that suffer change are those having tone-long vowels. These vowels, having been rarely expressed by the so-called Vowel-letters (§ 2. 3), may very generally be distinguished from pure-long, and diphthongal, vowels, which were very often so expressed (§ 2. 3 Rem.). In general only qamec and cere are tone-long in nouns, holem being for the most part unchangeably long. The forms with changeable vowels seem capable of being generalized under three classes or Declensions. * The principles stated in § 6 should be fully understood here; and it should be remembered that, when words are increased at the end, the accent plants itself upon the significant inflectional addition (§ 5. 1). ^ Such forms are those numbered 8, 14, 15, 16, 20, 23 in the Table of Common Nominal Forms in the Appendix of Paradigms, and a number of other Forms not given in that Table. These forms with unchangeable vowels might be cajled a First Declension, in which case the Declensions would amount in all to four. 46 § 18. THE FIEST DECLENSION. 1. A large number of words are of the same form as the perfect of verbs, and are chiefly participles or adjectives, though many are substantives. With these may be classed some other forms of words that are subject to the same laws. Together they may be called THE FIRST DECLENSION. They are words having: a in the pretone, or a. in the tone, or a in both places. Rules for declension. 1. With inflectional additions the accent is shifted a place, and the tone-long pretonic a e is lost, i. e. becomes vocal sh'va, by § 6. 2 c. 2. The very hurried utterance of the construct produces, in addition to this loss of the pretonic vowel, a contraction of the tone-vowel a e, that is the shortening of it in a shut syllable (sing.), and the loss of it in an open one (plur.) Plur. Cons, sing Cons.plur. 1) upright IB': nnu^-; Iti^i (i-|B^^=) ne^^ 2) old 3) great li?! 05i?i=) 'm 4) blessed ^na D'am •^n? '3113 5) overseer G) heart nnab> TO 7) star a?i3 D13313 2313 >3313 8) desert T » • anino i?T? nsinp Rem. a. Tone-long o does not appear mucli in nouns, but see § 29. The forms 1, 2, 3 with vowels a — a, a — e, a — o, may be considered the typical forms of this declension, see § 22. The forms 4, 5 are pass, participles, and 6 is a less common nominal formation. The forms 7, 8 shew that if the pretonic be immutable there is no change except in Cons., rule 1 having no application. A very few forms without o are similarly inflected. See Add. Notes. Rem. 6. The form a — e, has o in cons, sing., as no other short vowel can stand in the final accented shut (§ 6. Rem. h). If it be desired to retain the e sound, the form "]J3J with Maqqeph can be used, comp. § 10. 4. § 18. THE FIRST DECLENSION. 47 The new syllables that arise are half open (§ 6. 2 e), as in heart, Ubhbhoth, No. 6. 2. Feminine nouns. When the distinctive termination of the fem. noun is not final, its softening into ah cannot have place, the real ending aih must he assumed as base, and then the above two laws apply as to other nouns. righteousness njjns (=n(?ns) cons. (ni?'IS=) njm elder nji?] (=flJi3I) cons. (n3|3|==) nipt righteousnesses nipns cons. (nipns=) nip-iS 3. A few monosyllables with changeable vowels (« e) in the tone attach themselves to this declension. They arc probably real dissyllables which have undergone con- traction. The chief are T hand, D^ blood, w fish, yy^ tree. As they want the pretonic vowel the same law that applies to star will apply to them. See Add. Notes to First De- clension. fish j'n cons. sr\ plur. D''« cons. pi. ^5^ WORDS FOR PRACTICE, male ISJ holy tS^nj? perfect D'^On word 13'n short IS]? ^ lip nB|' '^ proverb ^B'D^ luminary IIKC ~ blessing HDIS heavy IDS prophet i<''35 vengeance ("IBpi — leopard "laj — fat N^ia corpse n^2i ' Exerc. Write the cons. sing, and the abs. and cons. pi. of the above words. (The ahs. and cons, dual of foj).) two n^iB^ sand ^IH to gather *)P« to lift up Sb^i sea DJ there 065* face D"'iS pZwn EXERCISE. PARSE AND TRANSLATE. /btpa .-n'sa .t^i:!:?^ j?^!?"! ,'''^t?': ,''>?''a5 ,T\T\^ .t^i^'ia :d:r ,ni'i'is ,n53ip5 ,*'f)STB ,snb .■'Tps /sab ,ia3 V " ~ ■ T ; - T V • T - - T • T - •• : " I V : jcp'^sn siba rt'tv^ triin 4 :ni''i?^asrj-bK n^tr; "la-:! n^n 3 &B n%^ Jiib 6 jn-in: nniFi ■'^a'^-brni* n-Tn D5>b TOtis 5 48 § 19. THE PEONOMINAL SUFFIXES. tiyvrf] spT^ bip bipn pins'; * i.as 9 ;D;n n|to"b? m^si -b» Q-'MbKn TB^K mbas-m ipfin K^nsn stoj lo ntef n: ^ Isaac. ^ Jacob. ^ Esau. {^"iMHrt The law of the Lord is perfect. The king saw the fat kine upon the bank (lip) of the river. "We have eaten the flesh of fat oxen. The words of the lips of the Lord are upright. I am not a man of words. Good words are the words of the law of the Lord. The waters are upon the face of all the earth. "We have heard the words of the holy prophets of God. Thou hast kept the hearts of this people from evil. Very great are the righteous- nesses of God. Blessed are the upright of heart. The vengeance of the people was great. The day of vengeance is in the heart of God. The proverhs of the king are perfect. All the fishes of the river. The desert of the sea. § 19. THE PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES. The separate Personal Pronouns are used only to ex- press the Nominative or as Subject (§ 12). Hebrew has not largely developed the adjective; instead of saying holy hill, silver idol, it says hill of holiness, idol of silver, and the like. Similarly for my horse it says horse of me. The possessive pronouns my, thy, his, our &c. are altogether wahting. But the noun being placed before the pronoun in the Genitive, two effects followed: first, the pronouns had not the strength of nouns and could not maintain themselves as separate words, and so became attracted in the form of Suffixes to the noun preceding them ; and second, the noun itself, which before an independent word would have stood in the form of the Const, underwent before these lighter fragments attached to itself a less degree of shortening, only a few of the more heavily ac- cented Suffixes having the power to throw it into tho Const, form. Thus the Suffixes are divided into light and heavy; all § 19. THE PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES. 49 are light, except those to a singular noun which express your mas. and fem., and those to a plur. noun which ex- press your and their mas. and fem. The light suffixes affect a noun like the Plur. or Du. termi- nation, the heavy throw it into the form of the Const, state. Particles, such as Prepositions and Adverbs, are generally Nouns in a fragmentary condition, and may take Suffixes, which are attached to them precisely as to Nouns. See § 49. NOUN -WITH SUFFIXES. Mas Fem. Singular noun D^D ^r\ nD» nn^ (horse) (word) (mare) (righteousness) sing. 1 c. my -ipw n?1 inow '^i?1? 2 m. thy *ID^D m?i *inD» W^l? 2 f thy ^DW n i;riD!iD 11 3 m. his ID^D 1) mow 11 3 f. her n nriD!iD » plur. 1 c. our W&1D 11 !iiriD!iD 11 2 m. your D3D!1D "131 aanpffl B?!?!?!? 2 f. your 15?» » pnpiD n 3 m. their DD!|D T B":?i nriDiD BCi?1S 3 /. their w> 11 WWD 11 Plural noun np^D an?T niDiiD flin? (horses) (words) (mares) (righteousnesses) sing. 1 c. my iDID ^•551 iniDiD "'WPI? 2 m. thy 1"'D1D » SI^ijIDID » 2 f thy T.D^D 11 ^^.niDiD n 3 m. his VDW n VniD!|D 11 SA her O^^w n niftiDiD 11 plur. 1 c. our JiyfjilD » «^hlD!lD n 2 m. your 03^D« ^rm ns^nipns 2 /". your 15''?» 11 ]3^niD!|D 11 3 m. their nn''D!io 11 ori'iniDW (an) 3 /". their in^D!iD 11 ^n^niDiD 11 NB. The dual takes the same Suffixes as the plural. The suf- fixes of sing, nouns are sometimes joined to fem. pl, particularly 3 pi, nniB'Bi their souls. 50 § 19. THE PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES. Eem. a. The suffixes of 2. pers. ka, k, hem, Icen, are for ta, t, tern, ten, according to an interchange of t and k frequent in language (§ 12). No Dag. in fc by Note p. 17. In the other persons the fragmentary element of the prononn may readily be seen. Eem. 6. The helping vowel between the stem and the suffix seems in aU cases traceable to % or a. Comp. § 17. 1. In the 1st and 2nd person the i sound prevailed as base, sust, su§ekha, su^ekh, susenu. Forms with a are rare. Job 32. 20. In 3. pers. the a sound prevailed, as 3 mas. susahii^usaw=susoi 3 fern, susah; 3 pi. susahem or susdham (2 Sam. 23. 6)=susam. Forms with e in thu, iha are rare (§ 45). Oen. 1. 21. Bern. e. Peculiarities are common. Sing, noun: 2 m. in p. IDW, Gen. 4. 11; plenary writing, HaDID Gen. 3. 9; 10. 19j 27.37, Ex 13. 16. In 2 f. ''3—, Jer. 11. 15, Ps. 103. 3. In 3 m. old form ri^HN his tent, Gen. 9. 21; SB. 21 j 49. 11. After vowels hu (§ 45, see Irreg. nouns); otherwise. Gen. 1. 12, Jud. 19. 24, Job 25. 3. In 3 f. mappiq omitted, Is. 23. 17, Ps. 48. 14. In some cases the fem. termination appears dropped, Gen. 40. 10 nSi for nriS3, Zech. 4. 2, Prov. 7. 8, Job 11. 9, cf. Hos. 13. 2, Ps. 49. 15'; 55. 16 (Ez. 32. 27?). Barely in 1 pi dnu, Euth 3. 2, Job 22. 20; on particles cf. § 49. In 2 pi. f. kbnah, Ez. 23. 48, 49. In 3 pi. m. 1»-^, Ps. 17. 10 (cf. 1D^ § 49). In some cases 10 appears 3 sing., c£. Job 20. 23; 22. 2; 27. 23 (Is. 53. 8? Ps. U. 7?). Uncontraoted form 2 Sam. 23. 6. In 3 pi. f. HJ— ^, Gen. 21. 29; 42. 36 ; ni-||-. Gen. 41. 21 ; niH-^, 1 K. 7. 37, Ez. 16* 53. After vowels hen (§ 45), and otherwise. Gen. 21. 28, Lev. 8. 16, Ez. 16. 53, cf. Is. 3. 17. Plur. suff. often defectively written by omission of yod, e. g. 3 m. IDffi, Gen. 33. 4, 1 Sam. 18. 22, Ps. 10. 5 ; 24. 6; 3 pi. m. Gen. 10. 5; 43. 11 ; Z pi. f. Gen. 4. 4.— Peculiar forms are: 2f ^3'',-^ 2 K. 4. 3, Ps. 103. 3, 4, 5; 2 pi. f. kenah, Ez. 13. 20; 3 pi. m. 10^ Ps. 2. 3, 5, Deut. 32. 37, 38; 33. 29; Mmah Ezek. 40. IG; 3 pi. f. Mnah Ez. 1. 11. My good horse ilBfJ ''pffi Your evil words Q^JJ'in D3''^3^ Eule. The noun with Suffix being really in the Cons, and de- finite, the rules for the Cons, apply to it and its adj. — it does not take the Art. and its adj. does. § 17 E.ules 1. 2. face D^B son \% pi. Q''3a daughter n| pi. niia my face '5| the moM's face B'^KIl ''iB before me ysb before the man B'^Ni'J ^iB^ after nng after me nrjN § 20. THE VEEB. 51 EXERCISE. TEANBLATE. ,tDi^iBa ,'-^mi2 ,Pi59ipa p'fy^'n ,!?j^3a ,'n;r\'s-pi ,rinaTB,in';ip : T T 1 • :t ■• t : • •• : Vt i •-• " : t - •" t nbiyb ^it :ri2Btia v^Nfrbisi sis^tibx nin^ H^in 3 :nn^5sb T : -T T T ; • I V T T T : tf V: T ; •.-••:• Q^ntiinb nbyjs n^s^n^b nsaa ^u5s< tosia n* na :nn5<* ^nbx • ; - ~ T : - r I jsi^ ,;. T : - T •.•-:!: - r t it - v: rrin^TB k-ti di'iri-bs sn^i'n* Tonx na jdik ^5a iss tia* • T > • ~ T ! « T • : - T T T T •• : ■.".■ }„ 1 Lot. ^ pi. of E'lK. - See Table of Irreff. Nouns.^ ^ Ehud. * Words in pause. See § 10. 5. Your blessings. Her corpse. My commandments. Her lips. Thy words. His face; her face; my face. And his words we heard out of the fire. Thy law is in my heart O my God. God has redaemed his holy ones. He went down to-Sheol unto his sons. The Cherub put out his hands. Thou hast heard my voice out of thy temple. We sat before her. The words of thy (/".) lips are as the sand which is upon the shore of the sea. He came and in his band a sword. Very good are the proverbs of his lips. We have sold our asses. Ye are my sons and my daughters saitb (perf.) your God. My heart is in his law c ontin ually. I have kept all his commandments. Thou hast kept their heart, our God. I have kept your hearts. The day of vengeance is in his heart. Thou hast kept my law and my commands. He liftgd his corpse upon the ass. Their hearts are fat. Thy perfect law. This is flesh from my flesh. By (in) all his great prophets. § 20. THE VEEB. 1. Boot. The root of a verb is considered to be the 3rd sing. mas. perf. of the simple form (15. 2). This form is called Qal "light", in distinction from all the other forms, 52 § 20. THE VEEB. which are heavy, heing loaded hy additional inflectional letters. 2. Tenses. The verh has not Tenses strictly speaking. It has two forms, which express not time hut action ; the one expresses a finished action, and is called the perfect, the other an unfinished action, and is called the imperfect. The perfect action includes all past tenses of other languages, such as perfect and pluperfect (indie, and sub- junctive), and future perf. The imperfect includes all im- perfect tenses e. g. present (especially of general truths), the classical imperfect, and the future. The first form is often called the preterite, and the second the future, but these designations are proper to Tenses and are too limited. 3. Moods. Both the perfect and imperfect may be indi- cative', the subjective moods (subjunctive, optative &c.) are generally expressed by the imperfect and its modifi- cations (§ 23). Besides, there is an imperative which is also derived from the imperf. And there are two forms of infinitive, called absolute and construct, the latter being a gerund. 4. Degrees of the stem idea. The stem idea or meaning of the verb is presented in three conditions or degrees: the Simple, as to eat; the Intensive, as to eat much, often, greedily; and the extensive or Causative, extending the action over a second agent, as to make to eat, to give one to eat. Each of these three conditions of the stem idea appears in three voices, Active, Passive, and middle or Eeflexive, though some parts are now lost. Thus: Simple. Intensive. Extensive or Causative. act. act. act. reflexive.^ pass, reflex. pass. ^ It is not in strict accordance with the methods of Shemitic grammar to call the Beflezive a voice. The refiexiyes are considered independent § 20. THE VERB. 53 5. Conjugations. What are called in other languages conjugations, do not exist. The various classes of irregular or weak verbs most nearly correspond to conjugations. The above seven parts are all growths of the original simple stem, which undergoes some modification, conso- nantal or vocalic, to produce them. 6. Inflection. Inflection to express person takes place by the connexion of the significant parts of the personal pronoun with the stem (§ 12 and 15. 2); and the third sing, as simplest is taken first, then the second, and finally the first. In an action which is finished rather the action itself than the actor is prominent: hence in the perfect the stem is put before the personal designations. In the imperfect, or action going on, the actor is more prominent, and the personal modification is prefixed. THE PERFECT. Sing. Plur. 3 mas. bajj he killed &c. 3 c. il!:t:i3they &c. Ol = D*l 3/-. n^ttp^she „ pi. of Jf^^ln) 2 m. F)ba]5 thou „ 2 m. Q^btop ye {tern of ^attem) 2/: T^i „ 2 /•. 1&!^ttjp „ ^fen of 'atten) 1 c. "nbtt]? I 1 c. ^5b'al5 we The terminations tern, ten are heavy, and, removing the accent, destroy the tone-long vowel in first syllable (§ 6.2c). Of great importance are the vocalic additions a i u, which bring out the peculiarity of the verb, thus: In verbal inflection with vocalic additions the vowels a e 5 in the tone syllable are lost, i. e. become vocal sh^va (§ 6. Rem. c, p. 17). formations, which may even have a passive; at the same time from the meaning of these forms they not unnaturally take the place of the pass., which they have altogether superseded in Aramean and Ethiopia. The ahove scheme, therefore, though an accommodation to Western methods, is not altogether without ground even from Shemitic usage. 54 § 20, THE VERB. Uses of the perfect. The Perf. expresses : a) The Aorist (Past), he killed. b) The Perfect, he has killed. c) The Pluperfect, he had killed. d) The Future Perfect, he shall have killed. (See § 40.) Eem. For fern, ah, the original ath may occasionally be met witli, § 16. Bern, b, Deut. 32. 36; and for t of 2 f. s. occasionally ti, § 12. Eem. 6. esp. in Jer. and Bz., e. g. Jer. S. 33; 8. 4, 5, also 3. 20 rightly read. Plenary writing in 2 s, »»., Gen. 81. 30, Mai. S. 14. Compare § 31. Eor it ot 3 plur. Hn is found in two or three cases, Deut. 8. 3, 16, Is. 26. 16,— In pause n^BjJ, iJ^BjJ &o., § 10. 5b covenant XT'IS statute nij?S latter end n^inS seraph t^b^ to fall %i to bum f\1& to fly ^JJ o forget HDB^ unto 7S unto me ^blsj unto you 03''bs behold nsn, p EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. !r(^ip-nij 6 :c3n"'nb«-r\i§ ^initi 5 tpnn'^'injs n^sT sb 4 rnnb rbs !ij>5aB Kb bi^i'to'' "33 in nfm^ ^ax 7 :ijDKn-p ^ssmtd ' IT •• ; T ■• T ; • •• : J " V ~ T " T I • ; - T 'T'sn DpaiTD 10 jn-'ssi D'^a^ wara 9 ts^is ^ibas nab s • T V : ~ : "IT - ' T ; T I V T : T t t ns53 aitD nsti'] fito mBsi-brrH Q^ribij n^'n 11 :ffi»a "nnpb "a liam '^pnpb "a Ti^-nx Dsrrbs bwaa^ ia» 12 F)i3Tr;? «b ^aK Dsn'bsi nab "nnpb ■'a i»ffl "Ppw? "btxi n'-sni^n-ja ins ■'bi? 5]^ is :nasisa ir-ij Ta nnpb sb"] iij^s; jnatan bsa npb DTipbaa nsss'i iT^isi * Moses. ^ Samuel. Ye did not keep my words. The woman s tood before the king. The fire of Grod fell from heaven. God set (gave) luminaries in the firmament of the heavens. All the fishes of the sea perj^hed in the waters. All the males fell before the sword. The heavens of the heavens are God's (dat.) and the earth he has given to the sons of man. Thou hast fallen o (art) city in the heart of the sea. Thou hast kept the hearts of this people from all ill. I kept my tongue § 21. THE IMPERFECT &o. 55 from evil words. These are the proverbs of the wise king of Israel. We heard his voice from his temple. Their faces fell. We leant our hands upon her head. The blessing of Jehovah be upon thy children (sons). We sat by (upon) the waters of the great rivers. Ye have burnt their city in the fire. Ye have not kept my law and my ju dgme nts. She ba£e to her husband a son to his oldage. Ye have forgotten my words and the proverbs of my lips. On the seventh dayGod rested from the work which he had made. § 21. TKB IMPEEFECT &c. 1. Imperfect and Imperative. Imperfect. Imperative, sing. 3 mas. bttp'^. he will, may&c. kill,is,ivas, killing &c. 3 fern, baj^ri she „ „ 2 m. bBjpF) thou „ bbl5 kill thou 2/-. •^^tii^n thou,, ^^'Kp „ „ 1 c. Vajps I plur.Bm. Sl^ipip"', they ,, 3 /•. nSbtajpn they „ 2 m. ^^t?]5n ye „ 't'Og kill ye 1 c. bBp? we „ 2. The Infinitive. Inf. cons. bbp to kill (admitting the nominal prefixes and affixes). Inf. abs. blBjJ to kill (admitting no prefix and affix). 3. The Participle. Act. Part. m. boip or bop pi. D''bt:p killing f nbcip or n5^p pi. nibtip „ Pass. Part. m. bitjp pi. D^b^tip killed f. nbiltoP &c. 56 § 21. THE IMPERFECT &o. Uses of the Imperfect. The Impf. expresses: a) The Present, he kills (especially of general truths). b) The Imperfect, he killed (particularly of repeated past acts). c) The Future, he will kill. d) The Potential, he may or can kill, might, could, would &c. kill (See § 46). Bern. a. The abstract nonn 'which appears as infin. cons., may be considered to lie at the root of the impf. and the imper. The pre- fixes and affixes are fragments of the personal pronouns, though rather more obscured than in the perfect. The terminations ^-^ and ? — are probably worn down from ]^— 7- and ]? — . The latter is still common, both in 2 pi. and 3 pi.. Gen. 18. 28, 29 ; 33. 20, Ex. 9. 29. The termination ]^ — has the tone; in pause the preceding vowel is often lengthened, Josh. 4. 6, Ku. 2. 9. In 2 f. S. ^'-y- occurs seven times, always with tone, 1 Sam. 1. 14, Bu. 2. 8, 21; 3. 4, 18, Is. 45. 10, Jer. 31. 22. Bem. h. The imper. is the impf. stript of the pronominal prefixes. It has only 2nd pers., and has recourse to the impf. for all others. The first syllable of imper. is half open. (§ 6 Note, p. 17.) Fern, pL is sometimes written defectively, Bu. 1. 9, Gen. 4. 23, Ex. 2. 20, so in impf. Gen. 27. 1 ; 30. 38 ; 33. 6. — ^In pause the original vowel of sing, returns, Zech. 7. 9 ; so in impf. Prov. 8. 15. § 10. 5 c). Bern. c. The Simple Form or Qal has two Participles. The Pass. Part, is the only remaining part of the lost Passive. Se left off counting Tfepb ^Th Be would not keep "ibBf n3« \lh Rule. One verb subordinates ano.ner to itseK in the Jbifin. Cons., either simply, or more commonly in Prose by the Prep, h to. to judge tJSB'l to bury "laj?! to watch "lOB^l to eat ^5^1 a judge part.) grave *aj?J watchman part.] food ^38] to buy "CXi to steal 333 to pursue t)"]^ to cut JTTS dead riD lord, husband, Baal ^ga EXEECISE. TBANSLATE AND PABSE. jD-^asiDa ,'in'm .si-iaic: ,^tticn ,'-mi ,*i-i!a"a3 ,-iBTpb ,"i^tb» jni-H^n ,niBT9h .^anM ,DTn-;b ,-ibj ,^i3tn ,n^^T\ .sisa § 21. THE VERB TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE. 57 n^'ss nh55 wss 3 :dn''t3£ifi52-r)8« snaior) xb 2 :ninn jib "bica 6 :ir|^in'n "laiBb '•n^aji 5 :r'ini< iiBi^i 4 nnn-Ta " ; I V T ! : • " ; - T T : - : • t t | • pi2 bys^ D^ari •jibin :n;jn'; "ins "iSTa: "5? 7 tnjn Dsn jiahp-bs siBD sib ns^m laiab-bs bsn Kb naaba i^r^ ^nhi nbi5-ni* ^-lap 9 npr-ns* ^a]5b d':'::^^^ y'lS'^ fiCi^^ t^a 8 "33 iiiT 10 :d^ liia]: D^rib^n ■ui-'ij "iBi* ^a]3a "jp-tn ^''nsn bs-brnK'''bs v'^p nnsi 11 :b5i^-naT2Jb* na^^sa aps" nis^a yan^j fTnisKn ■'j^'-ai^ b?an ^s"'a2-r\x'i banin "iri'bs -n5< ntasiD N^n nx-ai tim n^iianii^ 12 jbarx* inbis "^bsi* T : • T : T • T : vit • J - : \ •• : :d';;is« ^na mia^ lan-nriF! naici-' x-'in'i, : ^"^yi risa bs'iis': na nnx nsn nVbin Dibna tjba''ai<«-bij D^nbi< ^m is :b2?a nbya j^'^ni nnpb ^ffix rrussn-by - IT -\ ; "IT ;I-T V -! T • T 1 Joseph. ^ Egypt. ^ See § 10.4. * Jezebel. * Deborah. ^ Abimeleoh. I 1(7111 pursue after her. I promised (said) to pursue after them. Pursue after me. He set the stars in the firmament of the heavens to rule over the night. Jehovah will judge this people. A city shedding blood like water. In that day I will pour out my spirit upon all flesh. Keep this man. Ye shall keep your hearts from all Ul. "We have left off counting. They left off counting the pro- verbs of his lips for they were as the sand which is upon the shore of the sea. His commandments and his words will we keep. His children (sons) will keep his covenant. Hands shedding* blood. VZl^'lT But I would seek unto God. He came to shed blood. We will burn your city with (in the) fire. Bury my corpse in the grave where^ the prophets are buried (part,). § 22. THE VERB TEANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE (ACTIVE AND STATIVE). (See Paradigm of Regular Verb.) 1. The perf. Qal may end in any of the three vowels deo, a taking the place of a (§ 6 Rem. c). Verbs are named 1 Verbs and adj. having no dual use the plural with a dual noun. ^ See Vocab. under "who". 58 § 22. THE VERB TEANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE. according to these vowels a, e and o verbs. Verbs ending in a are transitive, verbs in e and o are intransitive, though these terms in Hebrew do not quite correspond to the same terms in the Western languages. The class of intransitive verbs is very wide, embracing words that describe the condition of the subject (as to he full, to thirst, to fear, to love), even though capable of taking an object after them. The term Stative verbs, i. e. verbs of state, is used by some grammarians. Formation of Impf. The Perf. in d (Active verb) gives the Impf. in o, ^Bj?, ^bj?^.; the Perf. not in a (Stative verb) gives the Impf. in d, 123, laav Formation of Imper. and Inf. Cons. The Imper. and Inf. Cons, agree with the Imperf., being in o in Active verbs, and in d in Stative verbs. But see Eem. d. Form of the Participle. The Active verb has the Part, of the form ^oj? ; the Part, of the Stative verb is the same as the Perfect, sij? drawing near. Bern. a. The class of Stative verbs is very numerous. It consists . of words which express a) a bodily or physical state, as to he great, little, smooth, deep, short, old, and the like ; h) an affection of the mind or act of the senses (except sight), as to mourn, rejoice, hate, hear &c.; c) actions intransitive, or actions in which the reflex in- fluence of the action upon the subject is very prAminent, as to die, approach, wear (clothes), hew wood &o. Hem. h. Forms with e express a temporary state, those with o a state permanent, but this distinction is not now observed in verbs, though it is still quite prevalent in the participial adjectives derived from them. Verbs in o do not now number over half a score, but the e verbs are very numerous. Only a very few, however, have e invariably, this vowel being usually sharpened, except when in pause or in the open pretonic syllable, into a. Bern. c. The o verbs retain the o throughout the perfect; in 2nd plur. becomes o by loss of the accent. See Farad. Bem. d. The rule given regarding the agreement of Inf. Cons, with the Impf. is true in theory, but in point of fact the Inf. Cons, even in Stative verbs is generally in o; the number of forms in a is now very small in the Strong verb, e. g. S2\tf to lie, usually, Gen. 39. 10, 14, and others occasionally, Eccl. 12. 4, of. Prov. 10. 21; 21. 4, Is. 58. 9. § 22. THE VEEB TRANSITITE AND INTRANSITIVE. 59 Prom both types of the Infln. Cons, a f&m. has been formed, viz. n^Bj? {qoildh) from ^b]?, and n^Bj? {qitlah) from ^BjJ. Both forms are mostly used by Stative verbs. Gen. 24. 36, Deut. 11. 22. Comp. §§ 29, 31.1 To be great 1 , become great j '' to be able bbj to be sweet pno , to be holy ^"^ to fear NtI to be little fearing „ J little «| holy B'nijr to be old ]i5t to draw near Dlj? to hear VOB^ to be just pis to learn IB^v, *° ^^ bungry aST 1 am old ^nii?{ ifcwow ^njjT lawoftze "in^i; \ Rule. In Stative verbs the Perfect usually corresponds to the English Present. (See §46.) EXEECI8E: PARSE AND TRANSLATE. :t± ,b^m ,DP^i^ ,nbi; ,]ti]:ri ,^n:i3i5 .njbltn ,^sr n^'H'' Die b'^s'' 3 :n^nii3n iBDb pbb'^ ^^b 2 nssi d'^^^bs :TbK ini "Six -11235* D'^-Q'^in-brruit sim^ n-ip 4 :Dbi3> iy (■.••• - ■ T V -: • T : - T V - : -': t 1 It is interesting to observe that the vowel a is characteristic of the Active, e (rarely o) of the Stative, and u (or o) of the Passive, — that is, the three Classes of vowels correspond generally toAotive, Stative(Neuter) and Passive. In the Perf. Qal the place of the characteristic vowel is in the second syll., in most of the other parts it is in the first throughout. In the Active verb the type of the Impf. was perhaps yaq^ol (yaqtul), and in the Stative, yiqtal; but owing to the prevalent thinning of a to t in the language (§ 2. 1. 1), the syll. yaq was pronounced (and of course spelled) yiq. In favourable conditions, however, the a still remains, as in Verbs \st Crutt., 'Ayin Vav, and 'Ayin Doubled. The last class is particularly instructive (§ 42). The original form of the Act. Part, was perhaps 7Bp, like the Perf., and many of the adjj. of this form may be Participles. The^Part. qotel is a newer formation and has not j'et made its way into all verbs. See §§ 40, 41. 60 § 23. THE MOODS. VAV CONVBESIVB. i\xa pVi3 ^rft» nin": 6 jrim D^rts? s:i^ ^? wt np? 5 :3pn^ "d^5>t231 dtbi TO^ab p^-na ipr 7 :nTBib n^ni tin liTJ* •T! "• iWTJ"' ■ •• T.ITX XT. w>b 9 : ■:i^5sb ^nr mpn n^K s^nhsa-bii. nin^ nnx aiip 8 n-"!^ aab3 rribs nin^-D? obifl iaab n^n »b nabiai n^jjt fiKi:b TOb: l?ab r^^n ■^a^bs n^inn isoa i^ban s-^i?: lo sb yWbs ^rts nitT' nnj* laing 12 :rrrb^ rnn^~n» isoiomJn/ " niDa-b3 ^''ssb p^.2: I cannot draw near. I will be great. Draw near. The young- lions shall be hungry (pause). The God who made the heavens and the earth I am fearing. Ye cannot keep my statutes with (in) all your heart. Thou art little. Hear in order that thou mayest learn to fear the Lord thy God. They are not able to pursue. I am bereaved. I know that thou shalt rejgn. How should man be just with God! I am s ated-w ith bu mt-of Ferings and the blood of oxen I do not desire; cease' to draw near before me for your bands a re fu ll of blood (pL). How great art thou Lord! very deep are thy thoughts. § 23. THE MOODS. VAV CONVERSIVE. 1. Besides the ordinary imperfect, which expresses the action simply, there are certain modifications of it which indicate the relation of the action to the speaker's will or feelings. The speaker may throw his own feeling into the word in two ways, either by a sharp, hasty utterance of it, thus expressing peremptory jvish; or on the contrary by a lengthening out of the word, giving expression to the direction of the mind or action. The short form that arises in the first way is called the Jussive; the other or lengthened form has been named the Cohoriative} 1) The Jussive. The Jussive arises through a contraction of the last syll. of the impf. ; but as in the regular verb ^ Both the Jussive and Cohortative are comprehended by Eveald under the name Voluntative; for Cohortative Bottcher prefers to use the term Intentional, § 23. THE MOODS. VAV CONVEKSIVE. 61 this can take place only in HipHil (§ 27), the Jussive in all other parts coincides with the ordinary impf.; and in all forms with inflectional terminations the juss. and ordinary impf. coincide. The Jussive is found only in 2d and 3d persons. The Jussive (as the name implies) expresses a command, as VdJ?'; let him kill; or, less strongly, an entreaty, re- quest &c. — may he kill; or, with a negative, a dissuasion, as sibopn'^N do not (ye) kill. 2) The Cohortative. The Cohortative is formed by adding the syllable ah to the impf. The Cohort, is found (with rare exceptions) in 1st person only. The Cohort, expresses a desire or intention, as n'Jaipsj let me kill, I will kill. 2. The Emphatic Imperative. The same termination ah is added to the imper. 2. m. s. to give it emphasis, as nVoj? Oh kill! Eem. a. The sharp pronunciation of the impf. (by -which the Jussive arose) was probably accompanied by a retraction of the Tone to the penult, with the eflfect of leaving a short vowel in the last syll. As the Tone, however, could be retracted only under peculiar con- ditions, e. g. when the penult was open (§ 5 Bern, a), the accent usually fell on the last, the vowel of which it made tone-long (§ 6. 2 6). The only formal effect, therefore, of the Jussive (except in verbs H"? § 45) was to change the vowels t and & in 2nd and 3rd sing. impf. into e and o. Eem. 6. The Emph. Imper. has two forms TlTQJ) and n7I3|5 (qotldh, qitldh, half open, § 21, Eem. 6). The Emph. Imper. appears chiefly in the Irregular Verb (§ 32). 3. Vav Conversive. The conjunction i and is sometimes used not as a mere copulative to join or coordinate clauses, but with a certain subordinating power, so as to indicate that what is now added is the result or sequence of the preceding; as, he spake and (and so, and thus, then) it was done. The usage is this: After a simple perfect events conceived as following upon this perf. are expressed by the emphatic vav joined with 62 § 23. THE MOODS. VAV CONVEESIVE. the imperfect \ and conversely, after a simple imperfect the events conceived as following on it are expressed by vav with the perfect. As in this usage the vav seemed to convert the impf. into the meaning of the perf. and vice versa, it was named vav conversive. By modern Grammarians it is commonly named vav consecutive. Pointing of Vav with Imperfect, a) When joined to the Impf. this strong vav is pointed exactly like the Article (§ 11), as ^b|?n and he killed; VopKJ and I killed. b) The Tone is usually retracted from the last syll. to the penult, when this syll. is open (Rem. a above), as iai<^1 and he said. Pointing of Vav with Perfect, a) When joined to the Perf. strong vav has the pointing of vav Copulative (§ 15), as ^Bj51 and he mill kill; DR^iaipi and ye will kill. b) The Tone is usually thrown forward from the penult to the last syll., as F\^Bj51 and thou shall kill. On usage of vav conv. see particularly the note p. 63. Kern. o. As the form with vav expresses the speaker's feeling of the connexion of what he now states with the preceding, it is natural to suppose that the forms of the Voluntative (Juss. and Cohort.) are those lying at the hasis of the Consecutive Tenses.^ Eem. h. The drawing backward of the Tone in Vav consec. impf. very well suggests its connexion with what precedes, and the throwing of it forward in Vav consec. perf. suggests its connexion with what follows. The projection of the Tone is regular in 1st and 2nd sing, of Perf., but does not appear in 1st pi., and is not found anywhere in pause. It is also avoided when it would occasion the concurrence of two accented syllables, Deut. 14. 26, Am. 1. 4, 7. In weak verbs the rule of projection is subject to modifications. togrowup^^Jst. to be angry ISjJitQ sell "OO toburn^jlb^ to expire J?lS«t. to take (capture) isb to be sated V3^s'. to visit nj?B to h to me "b^ sign of ace. flK me ^J|\i<* ^ This is denied by some. See Driver's Hebrew Tenses § 70 foil. 2 See Table § 49. § 23. THE MOODS. VAV CONVERSIVB. 63 Keep thou "ibl^, 1X\)S^ Do not keep ibK'n-ljN he will keep lblj'1 he will not keep ibW^. ab let him keep "ibK'^ let him not keep ' "<"!?« I will keep t^» let me keep nnDB'x Rule. The imperative has recourse to the imperf. for all persons except the 2nd, and for the second if negative. The forms of imperf. adopted will usually be the Voluntative (Juss. and Cohort.). Draw near that I may judge riBBB'tjII D"]|3 Draio near that he may judge BfeB'^.l ilj? Rule. The forms of the Yoluntative (Juss. and Cohort.) with simple vav express (particularly after an imperat.) the purpose or design of a preceding act. a) He found the place and lay down 33^*1 DIpDH N30 h) „ and did not lie down MB' ^b\ „ c) he will find the place and lie down ^5^1 DIpBH K3D'; d) „ and will not lie down 23^), i^b] „ e) and the man lay down aau* ^»r\\ ,'ti'''«n 33B'n Note. Strong vav must be united to the verbal form so as to form one expression, if any word intervene then the other i. e. the proper natural tense must be employed, h d e. Again, the expression must stand at the head of the clause and precede the Subject; if the Sub- ject must stand first the converted Tense cannot be used^ — the other simple Tense must be employed, as in e. The conversive Tenses are properly used after simple Tenses (see 3 above), but the usage has pervaded the language to such an extent that they may be employed when no simple Tense actually precedes ; vav conv. impf. is the usual narrative past tense, and vav conv. perf. the usual expression of and with fut. action ; and in translating into Hebrew and with a verb may generally be expressed by the conversive Tense, in parti- cular vav as mere copulative should not be used with perf} EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. ^j>b n^ni nmi ^5x n^^i nn^ss 2 n^an ^n^in n^aiSK .. ; tt; -: •-; •: t:;» "t i:t x;:, rTiaj^xi "inj^ "b 'rqq tin} "sn-bs on'^ax "las 3 \^^:i^ •'ra ^ Heth. ^ The statements made in this Note are perhaps liable to some modifi- cation in Poetry; there vav may sometimes exert its conversive power though detached from the Verb. 64 § 24. SCHEME OF THE KEGULAR VEEB. Diss niDa ito-bs ip?;! ^!a;^ 6 :s!in onp n55i« nipTsn -s msn p trtr ^^m 7 jipiba-nK ib ^a^i ^b wi^ba-ns T T T I •• - T T ; V ; "- /r I : T : Vy53 npbi iT' nbis^^-iB nP5i 5^1=* nits st* DTfbss nrn V'lsn-bs' ni^a lixa ^inna D^ani 8 :Dbiyb ^m^ bssi o^w J VAT T - : : : T • - - : t : -t - t : • - - :DnKn bbi nanaM ciiya V'^'<'T^2> teJa'irt ito-bs 515^1 TTT : r'*;~ I TJVTT ~ "T TT T ■• "3 waiD: Kbi ibsHi n''bb553 rb? "nnpsii -jn'ss ors nr.'; 9 liisab '^21:? rrrrm ^ See §8.1. '^ GoDJ. vav in pretone§ 15. Id. * Impf. of n^B'. Thou shalt not lie down in that place. Let me lie down. Do not (ye) draw near. May the Lord judge between me and (between) Tt t)^?^ this people. Oh hear my grayer Lord! Let us draw near unto rfT-'R the Lord that he may judge between us. Sell to me this cave that I may bury my dead there. The man ate of the tree which was in -' : - the garden and God was very angry. And the calf I took and 77 'O burnt it* with (in the) fire. Thus saith (perf.) the Lord: Behold I will-give (part.) this city into the hand of the king of Babel, and he wUl burn it* with fire. Sarah bare to her husband a son, and the boy grew up. And God called the light (dat.) day and the darkness he called night. And the children of Israel forgot the Lord their God and he sold them into the hand of the king of Mo'ab. And thou shalt keep his law continually. And I re- membered his words. § 24. SCHEME OF THE EEGULAR VERB. simple. intens. caus. simp. intens. eaua. act. qal pi'el hipMl b?B bSB b''yBn pass. — pu'al hopli'al — b?D bSBSl refl. niph'al hithpa'el — b?B3 bSBfin — ' b'OQ bip b'^tipn - biap bipti btip? btopinn — * flN with suffix § 49. § 25. THE SIMPLE BEPLEXIVE, NIPH'AL. 65 1. The names simple, intensive &c. have been explained § 20. 4. 2. The word ^5;b to do formed the paradigm of the ori- ginal grammarians. Now the language, possessing no general terms like reflexive, intensive act., and such like, made use of the parts of this verb that were simple reflex., intens. act. and the like, as names for the same parts in all verbs. Thus the intens. act. of Paal is Ptel; hence in- stead of speaking of the intens. act. of a verb we speak of its Piel\ instead of saying cans. act. we say HipHil &c. ; — much as if we should speak of the amabo of a Latin verb for the /ut. act. &c. The use of !?jjb as a Paradigm is inconvenient for a learner, because, its second radical being a guttural, the characteristics of several of the parts, such as the inten- sive, are obscured ; hence the word ^Bj3 (though poetical and defective), is generally used in modern grammars.^ 3. "Intensive" means that which is increased within, and to express intensity the middle radical of the verb is doubled. "Extensive" or causative means what is increased without, and to express the causative a syllable is attached to the outside. WORDS FOR PRACTICE ON THE ABOVE SCHEME. to write 1TQ to be great ^1J to be heavy ^a^ to steal I'A to rule ^ti'D to pursue ^Tl to govern *]^D to visit IpD to sell TSa to take xh to speak "DT be holy ^1^ § 25. THE SIMPLE EEPLEXTVE OR NIPEML. The Niph'al is formed by prefixing to the stem the syllable hin having reflexive force. This syllable is con- tracted to n in the perf. and part, and one form of the infin., but appears entire in the impf. and parts connected. ^ The learner must not use 7B(? in Prose composition for "kill". The word is rare in Heb. and in use only in Poetry. 5 66 § 25. THE SIMPLE KEFLBXIVE, NIPH'AL. perf. ^Bjjl par^.^BJpa infin. abs. ^bjpi and C7bli)i7J=)hb'^7} infln. cons, and imperat. (IjBjJJn =) bis^ij imperf (^Bi??<7'; = ^9i?'n ibbsi ions" s"b D^scin ; IT ! • : -:- t:- - •-«... ;t" -tit D'!! TjSii: 4 :Dari yiijn sbsapi D'^rrbx •'asb yisti r^nifiri:: 3 "n^isa 6 jbaas^ nb^ri biia":! 5 \^\ti "rcn Qiija Disn nto ^3 t\p\ unh^ 7 nriBK Tj^sBttJi n^anj^n ^ds bsa Di^n § 26. THE INTENSIVE, PI'EIi &o. 67 S3 9 :biiaxin "^a nto-bs liy nis'' tib s : visa mNirnN T ~ •• » T T T " T • J V T T T T r V tn-^bs Qn^rt bb; xbi T-yn-bx a^i^n Jehovah is near to the hroken of heart. I am hidden from the face of Jehovah. Hide thyself from his face. Ye shall hide your- selves on that day. Thou shalt escape from his hand. And the earth was corrupted and all flesh was cut off hy the waters of the flood. The arms of the wicked shall be broken. And their city was burnt with fire. Let me escape in the day of fighting {inf. eons.). And the earth was filled with blood (ace). His dead was buried out of his sight.^ Thus saith (perf.) Jehovah the Grod of Israel: Behold I give (jjorf.) this city into the hand of the king of Babel and he shall burn it with fire, and thou shalt not escape from his hand but shalt be captured and shalt be given into his hand. Beware lest thou make a covenant with (dat.) the inhabitant of the land, and take of his daughters to thy sons. ■^ From before him. § 26. THE INTENSIVE ACT., PASS. AND REFLEX., PtEL &c. The Intensive is naturally formed by doubling, both in verbs and nouns, the middle stem-letter. 1. The Pi'el. Pi'el is properly intensive of Qal, that is, it adds such ideas as often, much, for a long time &c. to the simple idea of the verb, as liB? to break, laa^ to "break in pieces; or it implies that the action of the verb is done by many or to many. Sometimes when the Qal is intransi- tive the Pi'el becomes causative, as la^ to learn, lab to teach 2. Pu'al. Pu'al is the proper passive of Pi'el in its various senses. 3. ffithpa'el. The Hithpa'el is formed by prefixing the syllable hith, having reflexive force, to the root-form of the Pi'el, as bisj3, %pm. When the syllable hith precedes the sibilants D, 12', ^ the n changes places with the sibilant, as "iSFiB'n for ISB'nn; with s the n further becomes t3, as p'nBSn from p'is. With unsibilant dentals the n is assimilated, as intei'j for 'onn. 5* -1^ 68 § 26. THE INTENSIVE, PIE'L &o. In meaning Hith. is properly reflexive of Pi'el, as \i^ to sanctify, t5'^)?nn to sanctify oneself; but it very often implies that one shews himself as, or gives himself out as performing the action of the simple verb. Kem. a. The i in first syll. of Pi'el is a thinned a, cf. Gen. 41. 51; a appears in parts after the perf. The final e appears as fixed sound only in imperf. and connected parts ; the perf. has often a, probably the real vowel of the form, D^B' Jud. 1. 7. In a very few verbs e (fghol) appears in perf., 13'^ to speak, D33 wash, 1B3 atone. The infin. abs. is generally of form pa el like cons. Ex. 21. 36, Jer. IS. 17, but cf. Ps. 118. 18. In some cases first syll. retains the i, Lev. 14. 43, 2 Sam. 12. 14, Jer. 44. 21 &e.— Inf. fern. Lev. 26. 18, Is. 6. 13, Ez. 16. 52. — 'With vav conversive Pi'el is pointed 7Bj?M § 11. Bern, a, no Daff. in Yod. Cf. § 7, 4, Note a. Denominatives are often formed in the Pi'el, as ISJJ dust, ISJ^ to cast dust. Many verbs are found in Pi'el of which the Qal does not occur. In Pu. may appear for it, Ez. 16. 4, Ps. 72. 20 ; 80. 11, Ex. 25. 5. In part. Pu. initial m in a few cases falls away, Ex. 3. 2, iK. 2. 10 (Ez. 26. 17 is perf.). Bern, b. The syllable hith is a stronger reflexive prefix than hin, and the Hithpa'el less commonly has the passive sense. It has even a, pass, of its own in a few cases. Naturally it has reflexive sense, Gen. 42. 1. As in Pi'el the final vowel may be a, Deut. 1. 37; 9. 8. Eem. c. Other forms of intensive. Though the intens. is most na- turally formed by doubling the middle consonant, it may be formed in other ways analogous: — 1) By doubling the last stem-letter, pi' lei (pi'lal), pulal, gitlal, qwtlal, as ]5KB^ to he quiet, Jer. 48. 11, Job 3. 18; pass. ^"jOK 1 Sam. a. 5, Is. 19. 8, Hos. 4. 3 (Ez. 28. 23, Ps. 88. 17 may be textual^rrors). 2) By doubling the last two letters, p''aVal, qHaltal, as irjl.np to palpitate, pass. "IfilOn to be niu^ih inflamed. Ps. 45. 3, § 44. 3) In some stems as 'Ai/in Vav and Double 'Ayin §§ 40. 42 doubling- the last two letters is equivalent to doubling the whole word (with omission of the weak letter), pilpel: as f^'f fly, ^jgBJ^ flutter, ^3 roll, h^i whirl, ^S"?? sustain, pass. 73^3 (kolkal) from' 7^, comp. click- clack, dingdong. 4) By adding a letter to a stem or by inserting a letter, so that quadriliteral verbs arise, most of which follow the Pi'el in the method of infieotion, b. g. TE'"\S to spread, Job 86. 9, DD13 to consume. Pass. B'BtJ'l Job 33. 25. Ex. 16. 14. Others in hiph. Gen. 13. 9. Is. 30. 21. 5) By broadening the vowel a of first syll. into o=8 § 2, Poel, pass. Pu'al. The proper force of this form is conative, qotel to attempt § 26. THE INTENSIVE, Pf EL &c. 6^ io Mil. The form is rare in the regular verb, but is often used in- stead of Pi'el in verbs 'Ain doubled § 42. Exx. are tl'^ii' to strike root. Is. 40. 24, BSW to contend in judgment, Job 3. ] 5, cf. 1 Sam. 21. 3, Is. 10. 13, Hos. 13. 3, Ps. 101. 5 (Baer reads Ps. 63. 4 as Pw. in o). to break 13^ to break in pieces "taB* to speak IST to count *1BD to recount, tell, IBD to seek \Sf% to be holy ti'lj? to sanctify Pi. to sanctify oneself Sithp. to be heavy *15? to honour, harden, H. to get honour Sithp, to be great, grow ^"IJ tobringup,magnifyP«. to magnify oneself BifAp. to go 'SiVntowalk Eithp-tohideoneaeii^^iHithp. no, none ]'18 except DM ''3 to rebel J>E'B __ ■^ EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. nabi 2 n wuie dni "pb'^a Q^sa "la'^i rr^n-' ■'S D'tto lyaifi lE'npb naiDn n1''TX ^'■ai 4 jo^rtb^ niais Q^iBoa D's^ri 3 nin'' bip-n» iiyaa'i 6 :nrti^nnn=' D^ribj^rrnx 5 jini^ :iS3T23' D^ia Di< "3 na tiBiB nirs^ D-ib ^B3^ ikb v^^^bi 7 i - : • • - T 1 - \ V -; T - - -^ : J V T T : ^Pharaoh. ^ See §10.4. ^ See HB'K in Vocab. * See note a) p. 19. These are the words which I have spoken. Harden not your heart lest Jehovah thy God be angry. Seek ye my face ; thy face wiU we seek. Walk before me and sanctify yourselves. The asses have been found which thou wentest to seek. I cannot speak to this people for they have hardened their heart. We heard the -voice of Jehovah walking in the garden and we hid ourselves from his face. He said unto the woman, Speak, and the woman spoke. Keep yourselves from this great iniquity. And now behold the king walketh (part.) before you, and I am old, and I have walked before you from my youth until this day. 70 § 27. THE CAUSATIVE, HIPH'IL, HOPH'AL. § 27, THE CAUSATIVE, HIPH'IL, HOPH'AL. 1. SiphHl. The causative is formed by prefixing the letter h with i (properly a thinned a) to the stem, and expanding the final vowel to I, ^iBjpn. Rule for inflection. The final i is maintained in open syllables, i. e. with vocalic affixes (a i u) and has the ac- cent; in shut syll. it becomes a in perf., and generally e after the perf. In meaning Hiph. is causative of Qal, as tpB to oversee, T(?Bn to make one oversee, to entrust to. 2. Hoph'al. The Hoph. is passive of the Hiph. in its various senses. Eem. a. The i of first syll. appears only in perf., the real a else- where. The I of final syll. is merely an extension of e, which itself has arisen out of a. In inf. i sometimes remains in first syll., Dent. 7. 24; 2S. 48, Jos. 11. 14 &c. The initial he may be elided after prep.. Num. 5. 22, Is. 23. 11 ; 20. 15, Am. 8. 4 &e., of. Deut. 1. 33, Is. 3. 8, Jer. 39. 7. On the other hand the he sometimes remains in impf. 1 Sam. 17. 47. Bem.5. The Jussive. The Jussive is 7&j3^, and with caw cone. ^BjJM; in 1 sing, the t generally remains. Am. 2. 9. The Cohort, is n^'ipijij. The long imperat. is nV''fcijn. In Hoph'al for o there is sometimes u in first syll., 2 Sam. 20. 21, 2 K. 4. 32. Imper. in Hoph. twice found, Ez. 32. 19, Jer. 49. 8. Bem. c. The prefixed h may he a softened /, which appears in a few cases, Hos. U. 3, Jer. 12. 5, or from s or sh, an interchangeable sound. Aramean has a caus. shaqfel, and there are some nouns, though no verbs of this form in Heb. For h the other dialects have ' (t=gh=s=h='). to be king, rule ^fyii to make king Hiph. to cast "fjVf Hiph. to be just pis to justify Hiph. to destroy IDE' Hiph. to dwell las' to place Hiph. to divide hn Hiph. to remember "01 to commemorate Hiph. there is t5'2 he loill hide his face ViB TRD^ . mat/ he hide his face „ IFID^ and he hid his face „ ^RDM hide thy face Sl^iB nyfeDH, IFlDn hide not thy face „ "IFlDFl'^N let me hide my face ^iB iT^^feOS he will hide his face ViB TRD^ ^RDn § 27. THE CAUSATIVE, HIPH'IL, HOPH'AL. 71 Bale. The infin. abs. expresses the idea of the verb simply, without conditions of person, mode &c. ; hence when it precedes the finite verb, there is first the idea bare and then the idea modified; and the effect of the whole is to express with some variety of emphasis the fact (not the quality) of the action as now predicated in the finite verb.^ EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. 'Sbsi 5 jnij-'brt r^^ 01'*'^ V^ b-'^nnb D'^a'csn j'^p-ia s^bK Tibffla iT2J»i nsn 6 x^nn Diia ^;s Tnci^ inert 1 V " 1 r : \ •■ • - - - T • : - •■ : - -by ink si^-'ba"'' dsi'T'-ni* ^i^'ip'^i sinbtB^i 7 tnainn nya - ■ :~- T ; TIT V ;':•"• ; ; •"" t ~ - j r - -TT .-J.. ■:- tt-(«tt: "t;* :n-Tn nyna s^db-pis ifidfi •.• - T T •• I V r V •■ : - There is a time to keep and a time to cast away. And he rained ' '■ ^:; fire from heaven upon that city and destroyed it^ from upon the face of the ground. Justify not the wicked. Let me hide my face from this evil people for they have done- corruptly (hiph.) before me upon the earth. The king said, Cast his head unto us over* the wall; and they cast his head unto them. For he will surely-rain (inf. abs.) fire from heaven upon that evil city and will destroy it^ and it shall not be remembered more for ever. I have been cast upon thee. They went down unto the city to fight against it, but they could not destroy it. R^'uben said, Spill not blood, cast him into this pit which is in the ' ' ^ wilderness ; and they stripped Y6?eph and cast him into the pit "- "^ J (ace. term.), and the pit was empty. ti P^ ^"l ' When the inf. abs. follows force seems given not to the predication of the action, hut to the action predicated. 2 n« suff. § 49. 3 nj?3. 72 § 28. SKELETON PARADIGM OF THE EEGTTLAB VEKB. § 28. SKELETON PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR YERB. simple intensive causative qal niph. pi'el pu'al hithp. hjph. hoph. act. reflex. act. j)ass. re/?ea!. _ act. |)as8. perf. ^Bg ^Bi?i ^a|? ^Bi5 bwisno ^■'Bipri ^b;?i"j imp erf. ■jbj?'; %f^. ^?P.'. ^^R'. Vtepn^. ^Vi?! ^Bj?; imper. ^toij '7Bj?n ^Bj? ^Bpnri W" inf. cons. bbj? ^iai?n !?B)? ^B|3 ^Bpnn ^''iflpn ^Bijn inf. dbs. biB^ yt3|?ri ^BjJ ^Bj? "jBipn ^Bpn part. act. %'p ^B|20 7Bj?no ^"'BiJO part, pass . biiop bopi ^BpO ^9i?9 1. The names Nzph'al, Pfe? &c. indicate wAa^ vowels verbs have in the perfects of these parts. The i in first syll. of Pi'el and Hiph'il is a thinned a, ■which shews itself in all parts after the perf.; and even the e and i of second syll. seem to have arisen out of a. 2. The imperfect may be considered the part regulative of the imperat. and infin. cons., and these three parts end alike, and after the Niph. the participle also agrees. The imperf. ends like the perf. after Niph.; and in Niph. it ends in e.^ To this rule that the imperf. imper. and inf. cons, end alike there is, first, the known exception of the Qal of intrans. verbs, in -which infin. cons, usually adopts o, though the other two are in a ; and second, the Hiph. imper. agrees of course, not with the ordinary, hut with the jussive imperf., and ends in e. 3. The infin. abs. has o in the last syll. except in Hiph. and Hoph. where it has e; though see Rem. a § 26 on infin. abs. Pi'el. 4. The punctuation of the preformative letters of the imperf. is i (or a) in Qal, and elsewhere vocal sh'va. If the part begins with h the preformative letter displaces the h and takes its vowel. § 9. ^ Perhaps it is practically simpler for the learner to assume the infin. cons, as the base of the parts after the perf., and what is said above of the imperf. may be applied to it. § 29. SECOND DECLENSION. 73 5. The passives usually have no imperative. 6. After Niph. the preformative letter of the participle is m, pointed as the preform, of imperf. This m is possibly the pron. mi "who" used, relatively. 7. Finally it is of much consequence that the learner, l)efore quitting the regular verb, should well remember these points: where the first radical has sh°va vocal under it (2 pi. perf., inf. cons., imper. Qal); where the 2nd rad. has sh'va vocal (all parts with vocalic affixes ai m) ; where the 1st rad. has sh°va silent (at the end of a syll., imperf. Qal, perf., part. Niph., all Hiph. Hoph.); where the 1st rad. is doubled (imperf. Niph. and parts); where 2nd rad. is doubled (Pi. Pu. Hithp.) ; — these and such points are of importance in the irregular verbs. EXERCISE: PARSE. 0^03 ,"i53TB5 ,i'aTj5 ,:afi3'^ ,:2ri5n ,d''n^n3 p^zitb ,^FQ^3 ,q^'n ,bTBan ,t3|53 .i^airij; ,'^'3.m ,t\T\^._ ."iiama ,^ai^n % 29. SECOND DECLENSION. 1. The words embraced under the first declension were chiefly concrete words, having a resemblance in form to the perfect of verbs. A very large class of nouns have an affinity in form with the imperfect, that is with the ab- stract noun at the base of that form. They are thus them- selves chiefly abstract nouns. They are properly mono- syllables, but are pronounced and spelled as dissyllables through the slipping in of a furtive vowel between the last two radicals. A class I class. U class. 1) b^> qatl baj? qitl b'ap^ qotl primary form 2) b^p_ qatl htp_ qetl !?lsj5 qotl under the tone 3) ^B^ qetel ^B^ qetel ^Bj5 qbtl present form. 74 § 29. SECOND DECLENSION. The words are monosyllables with a short vowel of one or other of the three classes after the first radical. Under the tone the vowels i o became e o, § 6. 2; and a few words have remained in this condition, as n\i valley, T\i nard, pvfp truth. But there was, as in other languages,* a natural tendency to separate two final consonants by a furtive vowel, and a slight e (s^ghol) slid in after the second letter. The words thus became dissyllabic, though the tone- syllable remained the same, now the penult. The furtive e by a species of attraction depressed the primary a of first class also to e. The dilated form of the words thus appears only when the third letter is final. A smaller number of words had the short vowel after the second radical as qtal, qtil, qtol, under the tone gtal qtel qtol, 7^j7 7\S\) 7t9jp. These forms are chiefly retained by verbs and enter into the imperf. and related parts. From the furtive s'ghol the words are often called segholates, and according to the class of their primary short vowel a i o, segholates of first, second or third class. From the presence of weak letters the s^ghols may be obscured, but the invariable sign of this class of word is the accent on the penult. Rules for declension. 1) The cons, state is, of course, like the absolute. 2) With all inflectional additions except the plural, the word appears in its primary monosyllabic form, qatl, qitl, qotl. 3) The plural both mas. and fem. assumes the form of a word of first declension, with pretonic a, q'tdlim, q'tdldth, as if from the form gtal. When the pretonic a becomes lost, the primary vowel is resumed, qatli. qi'tti &c. * Comp. alarm and alarum; Gaelic tarbh=tarabh, Dutch Delft=De- left &c. § 29. SECOND DECLENSION. 76 A class. I class. U class. Tjb| king iBD book i|5'a morning ais. sing, cons, light suff. isbo ""IBD heavy suff. 033^0 n2"lBD abs. du. nisVa ansp cons. du. -fffa „ abs. pi n''D^o ansD cows. />/. ''5^0 nsp %A< SM/f. 15^0 nsp abs. sing. fern, ns'po niDp suff. '%'ha „ abs. piur. nisVo nnsD cows. pi. niaVa diibd 2. Feminines with segholate ending. According to Bern. 6. § 16 the fern, is many times made by simply appending t to the mas. This is most easily done when the mas. ends in a vowel sound or in a single consonant preceded by a tone-long vowel, but it is occasionally done even when a pure long vowel precedes. The words then end in two consonants and contract the long vowels of the mas. to their corresponding short, except that even e becomes a; in this way terminational forms arise like qatl qitl qotl, which, precisely as these do, resolve themselves into dissyllables, when without inflectional additions. mas. 0I^»») ^ttj? i^aa p^ro ^\T\) -iiajj fern. "?^l?» n^pl? nyaa &c. nu'ini nnitsf) or (ns^DD) (n^Bi') (^135) (»?i^n:) mi\>) abs., cons. fis^oo ^^l?!' '"15? riB'ni rm suff. irisboo ^nboi? "•i^l^a iRB'^^i inniai? plur. nisboo ni^Bj3 niTM nieJiim &c. cons. nia^a 11 J) !I rt 1. Many of these words have the fem. of the more ordinary form, and this is generally used in the absolute. 2. The jegholate form is generally employed in the construct 70 § 29. SECOND DECLENSION. and with suffixes, and sometimes also in the ahs. ; and some words seem to use only the ^egholate form. 3. In general the plurals are formed regularly from the ordinary fem. or from what would be the ordinary fern, if it were found. Consequently the original mas. must be carefully attended to. Bern. a. By § 22. Note segholates of lat class, baying the a sound, are from transitive verbs, and those with i o from intrans. verbs. This law does not apply to the infinitives which end like their im- perfects, in which the characteristic vowel stood in connexion with the preformative, § 22. Note p. 59. In a great many of 1st class in nouns and in all infiu. of form gtai the a has been thinned to i, and the inflected forms coincide with those of 2nd class. Some words have both vowels. See Add. Notes to 2nd Declens. Bern. b. For i the alternative e sometimes appears; and also u for 0. Bern. c. Compare the cons. du. with cons, plur.; the latter has half open syll. § 6. 2 e. The du., however, sometimes has pretonic a like the plur. Bern. d. The word n'hoshdh shews that the termination t shifts the accent just like ah (ath), of which it is therefore probably a con- traction. •WOBDS FOB PBACTICE. way ^^ righteousness plS i valley HJJjpS ir-ear ]Ji< knee 'Sj^S r>image oTi foot 7}T greatness 7l\ boy IT - thrashing floor ]^j|'». midst 31j7 i vow I"]? girl rr^T vineyard D'lS silver *)D3 wisdom n03n soul ^^^f' memory *13l ransom "IBlS tribe MB* food nVsN horn lip ' holiness B*!)? mantle flTHS^ TIT I ttt It » T - kingdom nsbOD war non'jO nurse Tpi^D i maid nriDB' D T T I - T T I ■ l»T - T 1 • a holy hill tS'lp Vl my holy hill "^y^ in an idol of silver t^M T^S my idol of silver ^Bp3 Wg his weapons of warfare inon^D v3 !Rule. A suffix defining a compound expression is appended to the last word of the expression. EXERCISE. TBANSLATE. Hy king. Our kings. His books. Her righteousness. Our knees (rfw.) Thy feet (du,). Our horn. Their silver. My way § 30. THIBD DECLENSION. 77 is hid {perf. fem.) from my God. For all flesh had corrupted his way upon the earth. And God created man in his image, in the image of God he created him. And your ways are not my ways. And all the people bowed-down upon their knees before their )) 1 3 king. Let thine hand-maid speak in the ears of the king. I have set^ my king upon Zion^ my holy hill. God ruleth over the nations, God sitteth upon his holy throne. The face of Jehovah .\ D^ is against^ the wicked to cut off (hiph.) their memory from the earth. And now inhabitant of Jerusalem and man of Judah judge ' ■^ between me and my vineyard. Her mantle. Her mistress. His kingdom is an everlasting king- dom (k. of eternity). And they hid (hiph.) the boy and his nurse from the face of the queen. I will cut off their bow and all their weapons of warfare. 1 ^Dl 2 |^,^_ s 3. § 30. THIED DECLENSION. 1. Besides the words resembling the perfect which form the chief elements of the first declension and the nouns having affinity with the imperfect and infinitive forming the second, there is another formation which along with the words that follow it may be called a third declension. This is the act. participle Qal, qdtel, probably a later deve- lopment and not found in all verbs. Third declension. The type of this declension is the act. part. Qal; and the declension comprises all words, whether participles or nouns, ending in e (gere) with a vowel un- changeable (by nature or position) in the place of the pre- tone. Rules for inflection. 1) In words of this class the verbal law of inflection is followed, that is, with vocalic additions the vowel in the tone, the e, is lost. 2) With consonantal additions the e being thrown into an unaccented shut (half open) syllable, becoilies the short vowel, i. e. e or i; i particularly with labials. 78 § 30. THIRD DECLENSION. als. ^Bj3 7Bj3ip ^i?o ISpD Q^ cons. h^p ^w^ "m ispa D^ vocalic suff. •h'dp "•Vt?!?? ^Vi?o nSDO laa' conson. suff. sjVlsj? iV^i?"? M^PO sjaa' 2. A few monosyllabic words in e attach themselves to this declension, the chief being |a son, and DB* wa/we, which are irregular in the plural. Bern. Words of the participial form retain e in cons., and generally other words. Those of forms misped, marbef usually take a; and a in first syll, of the latter form is thinned to i in the hurried cons., 1^3*113. In gutt. forms qofalkha appears. See additional notes to third Declens. 3. Many nouns are formed in Hebrew by prefixing to the stem the letter m (comp. Greek ending ma). This m is probably connected with the pronoun ma "what". The two most common forms of such words are those with vowels i — a, as BBB'a judgment, and a — e, as |>aio stall. The words express: 1) The place where the action is done, as |>3nD stall, from yy^ to H^i 2) the instrument with which it is done, as npiBC ^ey from nriB to open; 3) or more generally any embodiment of the action, as lilp^D plunder, from nj?^ to take. ■WORDS FOR PRACTICE, elder ]J5J priest ]Tf3 moon PIT altar liaiD mourning *1BD0 judgment BBB*!? stall I'aio'^pluiider )riipbl>^ child 9y\y Schild h'TiV key HFIBO xfork ibVD one who curses ^Vj?0^ frog JZIIBS dumb D^N -blind ly? Exercise. "Write the above words in cons. sing, and with a vocalic and consonantal sufif., observing which of them are of first dedans. ; and translate : This is my son and these are my son's sons. He sent the frogs upon all the land. All his prophets are dumb dogs they cannot bgi^. And the inhabitants of the earth shaU^o in that day like the blind and their blood shall be poured out like the dust. The § 31. VEEBAL SUFFIXES. 79 children of Israel ate the p assove r with (and) their staff in their hand. Behold the head of thine enemy who sought thy life (soul). The mourning of the dead shall be in all vineyards. These are the statutes and the judgments which ye shall keep in the land whither^ ye are crossing, thou and thy son and thy son's son. Their land swarmed-with frogs (ace.) in the chajabe^s of their kings. ^ See Vocabulary under "who". 8 31. VEEBAL SUFFIXES. VERBAL SUFFIXES TO HIPH'IL. Pf.bf. "piBipn Infin. Cons. ribB]?n I. s. c. '^^''Bj?'! ib^Bjjn (subj.) ''ib-pi>T\ (obj.) 'ifhm 2. s. m. ii'^i^ f?Vi>i5 (^^^- ^^^ obj.) r,f- ^V— ^^^ppn » — 3. s. m. i'7>Bi?n » Partic. inbBijn „/•• nb''Bj?n Jt ^■'BiJO nnbBjjn 1. pi. c. li^'^iP'T !ii^^Bl?n "i'm unbBjjn 2. pi. m. D3b''iaj3n &c. &c., mostly as — « f. 13'?''Bipn as noun the noun — 3. pi m. qV"?]?'? nribBipn „ f. mn W^^ipn Impekf. ^■•^j?! Impee. as Impf. ^'?'«Bi5^ 1. s. c. ■'^^^^i?! ''4^''Bi?i — ■^'■^'^i?! 3. s. m. 13^— iin^-'a;?:: smb^Bjjn in^''Bi5: . f- nfe-O^^Bij: O^TI?n O'^'^i?- 1. pi. c. w^^^i?! iiHi?5 2. pi. m. 05^'^!?'- — . f. )^)W. — S.pl.m. D^'Bi?! D^-iBpn ni'^iBj?^ ,, /. I^-'b;?:: 1^'Bi?" 1^^''^!?! The pronominal suffixes to the verb almost always ex- press the direct object or accus., rarely the indirect or dat. The suffixes do not express reflexive action; we cannot express / killed myself by suff. ; either the reflex, verb, or 80 § 31. VERBAL SUFFIXES. the simple verb with some circumlocution for self, must be used. The following principles will be found sufficient: 1. Before the suffixes verbal forms altered or rubbed off are restored; 3 fem. s. ah becomes ath (§ 16 Rem. V); 2 fem. s. t becomes ti, and 2 mas. pi. tern becomes turn, (§ 12 Rem. 6), though the weak m disappears. 2. Verbal forms ending in a vowel append the suffixes in their shortest consonantal form {ni, ka, k, v, hu, ha, nu, kem, ken, m, « § 12) immediately to the vowel termination. 3. In forms having no apparent vowel termination a help- ing vowel is used: 1) The suff. ka kem ken, as in nouns, have reduced the helping vowel to a mere sh'va, § 19. 2) All the other suff. have a full vowel. Now the verb had originally three vowels both in the perf. and imperf. In the perf. the final vowel was a, and hence with suff. to the perf the helping vowel sound is a. 3) In the imperf. some more indefinite sound ended the form (e or u perhaps) and this appears as e with suff. to the imperf. The imperat. follows the imperf. 4) The inf. cons, takes the suffixes of the noun. 4. Effect of suff. on preceding vowels. 1) The perf. Qal of all forms, and imperf. and imper. Qal in a, follow words of the first declension, preserving the tonic and losing the pretonic vowel when it is changeable, § 18. In open pre- tonic syllables a becomes a § 6. 2. 2) The infin. cons, and imper. Qal follow the second de- clension, the form q'tol being a segholate of third class. (The imper. of the form blS\) follows the first declens. See above 4. 1.) 3) All other parts of the verb (ending in e or 6) follow the verbal law, that is, with vocalic additions lose the tonic vowel, and may be said to follow the third declens. § 30. 5. In the imperf. between the accented helping vowel and the suffixes ni nu of 1st pers., hu ha of 3 pers. s., and § 31. VERBAL SUFFIXES. 81 ka of the pausal eka of 2 mas. s., the letter n, having de- monstrative force, is often inserted, and this hy its union with the conson. of the suff. gives rise to forms enni (anni) ennu, ennu ennah, ekka {iov.enhu, enha, enka). Occasionally forms appear in which the union of the n with the follow- ing letter has not yet taken place. Bern. a. On Ferf. See remarks on nominal suffixes, § 19. In 3 fem. sing, the termination ath retains the tone except with heavy suf- fixes. The suif. of 2 fem. s. is oftener ekh; comp. Jad. 4. 20, 1 Sam. S5. 32, Ezek. 37. 26, Mio. 4. 9 with Is. 54. 6, 60. 9. In 3 pi. m. Ifi-f Ex. 15. 10; 23. 31. Once 3 s. m. tahu for to, Ezek. 43. 20. Bern. b. On Impf. In the Impf. and related parts the sounds eni, enu of 1 p., and em, en of 3 p., may become in pause or under special phonetic influences, ani, anu, am, an (see § 10. 5 Bern.), cf. Gen. 19. 19; 29. 32, Ex. 29. 30, Deut. 7. 15. Suff. of 3 pi. m. in VH-^, Ex. 15. 7, 9 &c, Ps. 2. 5; 81. 10, 13 &c. Exx. of enni (anni) Gen. 27. 19, 31, Jer. 60. 44; of ekka Gen. 86. 3; 49. 25; of ennu Gen. 9. 5; 28. 22; 49. 9, 19, cf. 3. 15; of ennah Gen. 31. 39; 6. 16; 13. 15; 15. 8; Hos. 2. 5. In some cases the n is not assimilated, Jer. 88. 24, Ex. 15. 2, Deut. 33. 10. In other oases pi. in ]1— is base of the form, Prov. 1. 28, Ps. 63. 4, Is. 60. 7, Jer. S. 24 ; 5. 22, cf. Job 19. 2.— The 2 and 3 pi. fem. assume with suff. the form of 2 pi. m., Jer. 3. 19. Bern, c. The infin. cons, uses the verbal suff. of 1 p. s. to denote the object, me; but in the other persons the nominal suff. alone are used to express both object and subject (him and his). The suff. to the participle are also those of the noun, though in the singular of partt. verbal suff. are also used in poetry, Gen. 4. 14, 15, Ps. 18. 33. The infin. cons, with suffixes ka kem ken occasionally appears of the form qHolkha instead of qotPkha, Gen. 8. 17; 3. 5, cf. Deut. 87. 4; 89. 11. The inf. ^13(7 is inflected ■'^IpJ?, § 29 Bern, a. Gen. 19. 33. Bem. d. The demonstrative n is occasionally seen in imperat. and perhaps a single time in the perf. and part.. Gen. 30. 6. It may be repeated (foot note p. 17), that with suff. the first syll. of infin. cons, is half open ; and that on the contrary the prep. 7 unites with it so closely as generally to form a shut syllable. The imper. is also half-open. when he kept IIOB'? when the man kept ^^i) *lbB^3 before he kept me ' ^riK n»B^ "ipi before the man kept me ''t^ii B'^^n IbB' ''38^ when I kept the man B'liSi^n^ nOB^S or „ ''ni»B' IB^S? until I keep the man „ '«"1«3B^' "Tg or „ IfeB'iJ nB'K IJi 82 § 32. IREEGULAB, OR WEAK VERBS. B.ule 1. The infin. cons, has the government of its verb and may take suffixes and prefixes. The usual order is infin., subject, object. Rule 2. Instead of the infin. cons, with preposition the finite form may be used with a conjunctional expression formed of the prep, and relative.* EXERCISE: TRANSLATE. ,''5"i52'ti*i ."s^aia ,Tro2tb^ .apaiab .i-iaiBii jSTi'iati j-'sniaiD ,^D^t53ti ;,Ti5aiflr) ,'innaTS': ,n3'na\a;^'i ffrqm ,^?TBab»5 ,"'5*1131'' ,ni3T>1 ,n3"l3tK .Dn'^ST ;''5t5Bffl ,St23ffla ,Dilt3STD ,D''Fi2?ap'i ,t3sai? ,!?}ifai?'] ;?}*Q5?i ,0^25? ."ST^in i*!"!"!?!™ :?;2ip'; iTjsapK ,''sapa ,i''sap53!i I have gathered thee. I will gather her from the sides of the earth. And thou shalt keep me in thy way. Keep thou him. "1 li"^ Before she kept the man. These are the generations of the heavens and the earth in the day of their creating (niph.). Judge me according-to my righteousness. Bury me not in Egypt, but I will lie with my fathers and thou shalt bury me in their burying- place. Make-me-tread* in the path of thy commandments for in it I delight. Jehovah shall keep thee from all evU, he shall keep thy soul. What is man that thou rememberest him or (and) the son of man that thou visitest him? Thy word^ is proved and thy servant loveth it. Before he cut off all flesh by the waters of the flood. He promised to mention him before the king of the land. § 32. lEEEGULAR OB, WEAK YEEBS. 1. The word ^J?B to do was used as a paradigm by the older Grammarians. Now the first letter of this verb being Pe, the first letter of any verb was called its Pe; and in like manner the second letter was called its !4j/tn, and the third its Lamed. This mode of designation is employed in weak verbs. * Prepositions are really nouns in the cons, state. § 33. PE NUN VEEBS. 83 A weak verb is a verb whicb has one or more of its three stem letters a weak letter. The weak letters are the Gut- turals, the Quiescents and Nun, i. e. the letters « n n J? "1 1 '' ]. Thus such a verb as ^Bi is called a Pe Nun verb ; i^i a Pe Yod verb ; Dip a 'Ayin Vav verb ; jjaB* a Lamed Guttural verb, and the like. The letters 'Aleph and ffe being gut- turals at the beginning of a word and quiescents at the end have a double nomenclature, thus Tlbi is a Lamed He, but ']^n a Pe Gutt., xsa a Lam. 'Aleph, but i)DN a Pe Gutt. In a few verbs Alepk quiesces when first radical, as in ij:k, these are called Pe 'Aleph verbs. If a verb have more than one weak letter it is called after all the classes whose pe- culiarities it shares, rn> a Pe Yod and Lam. He verb. A verb like hhi, whose second and third letters are the same is called a Double 'Ayin verb. DESIGNATE THE CLASSES OF THESE VERBS. ,111 ,dii, tripn, ,sifi'' ,nb'^ ,p ,ti«Ta ,t:ntj ,nbT2J ,biK jAip ,qni ,5np ,saD ,sin ,bbp ,5>j>i ,tia5 ,Dn5 ,nra ,bpt ,^n5> § 33. PE NTJN VEEBS. The letter n in Hebrew shews the same kind of feeble- ness that it has in other languages, when it is not sustained by being followed by a full vowel its sound is apt to be lost in that of the consonant after it, in-licio = illicio; yin- gash = yiggash. 1. When n stands at the end of a syllable (imperf. Qal, perf. and part. Niph., Hiph., Hoph.) it is assimilated to the next consonant, which is doubled, feiwte^., ^i?3ri=!7''B^I {yin-pol=yippol, MnpU=hippU). 2. When n not having a full vowel of its own begins a word (imper., inf. cons. Qal) it often falls away altogether, as B*a for B'JJ {gash for n'gash). 3. When n falls away in infin. cons, this form assumes the fern, termination t, becoming a segholate noun having i when inflected (§ 29. Eem. a), as r\^i, ''riB'a. 84 § 33. PB NUN VERBS. Bern. The n initial does not usually fall away in verbs imperf. in o; and hardly ever in 2 pi. perf, in any verb. In many cases, esp. in later style the n is not assimilated, Deut. 83. 9, Is. 58. 3, Jer. 3. 5. — The root ^ii used as Far. is a defective verb really, see final Note § 45. The n is not usually assimilated in verbs !4.i/m Gvit., except niph, of On^ to repent, and occasionally HHS to descend. 4. The verb jni to give assimilates its final n also in perf. and infin. cons. It has e in imperf. and imper., ]Fi% )n. Inf. cons, is nn, "inn (njn ■•fiin). The verb njsb to take assimilates the liquid I as if it were n (in Qal, Hoph.), as impf. nj?"; for nj?b\ 5. Nouns from Verbs ]"s. Nouns with m preformative are of the form ^Fia, as ^B)3 offal, nan stroke. to deliver ^Sifii. to tell liiBi. to vow 113 to fall ^S3 to approach B'Ji to touch V^i to set nSJflis. to look tDSiffi. to smite f\i!^ to deceive iXf^lSi. to kiss pti'J EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. ,Bb^s2F! ,rm ,^bs|^i ,^253 .nbsrj .b-'SK ,ci53rj ,bs3 ,iinj3 .-jn :wB3b ,bB5^ ,t33n .^n^an ,-iari .CiS? ,W5ri ji^bN n^aia ra^ji sixt 3 lia^iab nsTcn-bi* n;n^b -13 rvzrm rrin: bs^i 5 .•D'^nsisn laDsi na^saifin wiaan 4 T ■* . T , ■•— "T - ; t:-T- T v~ mfxb nja np^ it^k ybani rnisbs^ nn^ np*i oisn-b:? T"; TT »T ,•-: T"-; T ;-■ l~"~ ttt ■" J"TI« • T;T • • T • T-T V-: r-T TTT "T Tjb ^3 nannbii rts-iNb ynija ?;^nnn D^ax^-bij n;n^ nsH 7 asa D^D nsni ap?:: obrj s :r;D b? D-ian bB^insin^ ^ See § 7 note on effl^. /^jWe conjunct, p. 19. '^ Abram. Give thou. I will not give my silver and my gold. Tell it not in Gath. Look not (/".) after thee lest God smite thee. Deliver me for thou art my salvation. Give ye glory to Jehovah. When § 34. PE GUTTURAL VBBBS. 85 I gave the woman to the man for wife. I will deliver thee and thy tongue shall tell-of my righteousness. The serpent deceived her and she took of the tree and gave to her husband. They feared to draw near lest they should be smitten before the kings. Thou hast caused a deep-sleep to fall upon me. And he brought near the man and he took him in his arms and kissed him (dat). § 34. PE GUTTURAL VEEBS. See the rules for Gutturals § 8. 1. By 2nd rule of Gutt. a gutt. requires a hateph for simple shVa vocal (2 pi. perf., imper., infin. cons., Qal). 2. By 1st rule Rem. a, i before gutt. becomes e, and by 2nd rule the short vowel repeats itself under the gutt. in a hateph corresponding to itself. Thus: niph. ^Bjji in gutt. ^am and then ban) hiph. perf. IpiBijrj ,, !?''Bliri „ ^wn hiph. inf. ^''Bjjn „ „ ^''Onn hoph. ^ap.'j „ „ ^ann impf. qal ^ajj^. „ ^Bllj „ ban; ^Bjj: :, ' „ ^an? 3. By 4th rule of Gutt. the gutt. cannot be doubled, but, remaining single, causes the preceding short vowel to be- come its tone-long (parts connected with impf. Niph.), ^a!!)n='?Bnn. " It ■ - T - Bem. a. In Active verbs (impf. in o) the primary a appears with the preformative (Note p. 59), as TbJ?^, and i in Stative verbs, as 3nK\ With initial t< the i appears even with impf. in o, as ']bKJ; but when rapidly prouounced (as at a distance from the tone) the sounds —, — — become -:; — r- in the 1st Gutt. verb, Gen. S7. 41, Numb. 3. 6, Jer. 15. 14. Eem. 6. The harder gutturals, while they always depress the vowel (i, u to e, o), often keep simple sh'va at the end of the syllable, as DSn^ he will be wise. Exceptionally a appears in niph., Gen. 31. 27. Attention should be directed to the half-open syllables in this verb, e. g. in forms ending in a i u; e. g. 1b5|]l pi. nDS?^=nDJ?', § 6. 2. cf, e, of. Note p. 17. 86 § 35. PE 'ALEPH VERB. to dream D^n to leave 3tJ? to stand ^I3J> to slay SVf to pass 1 to serve 1 to embrace pan to count itJ'n cross j ""^^ till / "to sin «t3n ^^ ^^ ^^ f piH to witndraw) to love 3nK to take tHN (^'BN refrain j' to be wise DSfl to bind VfSn to believe pNffi. EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. :w5s I'asa t»t rasb nas »)> n^sbxiin "sts nsn 3 itpv :iT -■ -:- I •■ : t t : s t • t ; - •• ; ■• • I •• PIT}. 5 iY^iXrrby nbiia m-i -lasi;! ribins D-^ribK -et*;] 4 Sb naiansi nirfa ra^n nin«i 6 jnnb t\cb Dn'insb TV : : — T - I "v:v t : -: vt "t t -:- :nb ""na^sb isanb nin'; -sribffl 8 Abraham saw a ram taken by (in) his horns. And there shall be mourning in all vineyards for I will pass in thy midst saith (perf.) Jehovah. Pass not the river lest ye be smitten before your enemies. Jehovah will not permit (give) them (aec.) to pass the river. Our land shall not be tilled for our enemies shall stand in the midst-of-her. Let me cross the river that I may make this people inherit the land which Jehovah sware unto their fathers to give them. Bil'am said unto the she-ass, Would-there-were^ a sword in my hand for now I would slay thee (perf.). They said unto him, To bind* thee have we come down, to give thee into the hand of thine enemies. And the people served (pi.) Jehovah all the days of Joshua^, and all the days of the elders who pro- longed* days after Joshua. And he made to pass his children in the fire. 1 \^l ^h. 2 "IDS. 3 j,j2;^;,,_ 4 ^f-jpft. of TIK. § 35. PE 'ALEPH VERB. 1 Pe kleph verbs are a sub-class of Pe Quit, verbs. They have one peculiarity, — in impf. Qal ^Aleph quiesces in the vowel d; in all other respects they are Pe Gutt. This d is for d, ltt^w'K;=nDt<\ § 35. PE 'ALEPH VERB. 87 The verbs belonging to this class are five: law to perish, ^gij to eat, in« to say, naw to be mlling, nSK to lake, and sometimes i);j{m to slay tjnB^ to serve ITlB'Pi. to lean jJ^B'iVt. to drive B^liK t cr I P''^ to fight nn^iVj. to choose "ina to refresh nj?D ° ^^ 1 PJ" ^aal ^K3 gate -IJ??* EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. ,psn^ ,Vniii jint:-: ,ii5ar!zs'^ ,^psT ,r\^iB^ ,^5^si .iiayts ,^rnt2 nrijpM lysn nnn *i55iJ3!i'] Di'-ba'i iisni') n^a tssa ^i-njs;; Dis^ 3 :d^?j n;?b nias^ naixn-ns 'rbyb -jir-jaa sinnVia^i rrin^ n^^ s^ati^i nSn^ to^n^ ^'axb bi^^to^ ^isi-nx a^Dnsn T ; T • J ; T : ■• ; T ; f : V T ; ■• •• t : • •■ : v " -: - -nx ifinTs iBKb nitT'-bx bi isjl! ?is>DB' ?inon inajp plur. abs. n''j?B?n tnya)o n^n! V nin3|a cons. •'JiB''! V!&)S ^J21i » » (wicked) (rejoicing) (seed) (report) (lance) (altar) In second declension the final short vowel is a (§ 8. 1), and in all the declensions the quasi-vocal shVa before the consonantal suffixes ka &c. becomes a hateph. to send n^B^ to hear yatif to be satisfied J?aly to forget n3B^ to sow ;>ir to plant yt33 to take Hp^ to halt J?'?3 to rise (shine) flit to make grow iiVnMiph. to sprout HttS EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. saiflsi v5sa ^53^n 'ni'na n^tnab s-^isb tixba rbin" ■'5bi« nsn - : T T • V T • I VAT ~ I : T ; ■ J V T : It;--" ' t •• • -,,, • : - TV-:: w - • : - I • ■■ ; v ' : nx'iab i52n.5 yrbs naixn-ia n^ssui psa -ja tip) 5>^^:! 3 — : - V -: — tt; vi tt v * -r" (- ■- t -; - : : pnx^i :ib iffl!!|;-^i< i5?5i ^'^l^'niij d':^?.?! Dti)3*5 :pi^!^ sb "iJas'i inisn nbs "s ^snbia lii^'j^n nsais^si nto'- ds iii'^* - - AT - T T • .... - . T V - * -:- ap^!! TiJ> 'im^, sb i\^)'Bti ib "i52i^»i { ''?P3?'!}4^ ^d^? ""S ^tjbici!^^ nbi^b? ?ba i^^rT! 'bt^^is^-t^x ^5? * On double accMS. see Rule § 38. ^ Jabbok. ' Penuel. This song shall not be forgotten. In the day of thy being anointed (niph.). And now lest he put forth (send) his hand and take of the tree of life and eat and live^ for ever. I have heard thy report ^ "in § 42. 92 S 38. LAMED 'ALEPH VEEBa O Jehovah. Jehovah will give you in the evening flesh to eat, and bread in the morning to be satisfied (i/nf. Qal). He caused thee to hear his words out of the fire. Let those-loving {part, cons.) thy salvation say: Let God be great! Behold I am sending my messenger before thee, hearken to his voice. And he sacrificed and was satisfied-with the flesh {ace.) of his sacrifices. And he fought against the city all that day and he took the city and the people that was in it he slew, and he beat-down* the city and sowed it with salt (ace). And my master made-me-swear Qiiph.) saying, Thou shalt not take a wife to my son from the daughters of the Canaanite* in whose land I am dwelling. § 38. LAMED 'ALEPH VERBS. The irregularities of the remaining classes of verbs (ex- cept verbs Double 'Ayin) arise from the presence of some of the quiescents « 1 1 in the stem. Verbs K"S, in which t; quiesces in the imperfect only, have been already treated, §35. 1. Verls Lamed Uleph. When m is third stem-letter, it causes the following peculiarities: 1) At the end of a syllable s is silent after the preceding vowel, which is lengthened (except e), § 9. 1. Thus a in impf. Qal, § 37, Niph. &c. becomes «, as KSft, SSO\ 2) In perf. Qal of active verbs (those in a), the vowel a remains throughout, as riNSD. 3) In perf. Qal of stative verbs (those in e), in all the other perfects, and in all imperfects and imperatives the a sound has undergone the common deflection into e, the vowel being e in the perff., and e in the imperff. and imperr., as mbQ, HNsaa, ni«son. Rem. a. The letter K, being silent, sometimes falls out in writing, as ■'HS^, Num. 11. 11, Jud. 4. 19, Lev. 11, 43, Gen. 20. 6. In 3 f. S. old form in t is found, e. g. Gen. 83. 11, Ex. 5. 16, Is. 7. 14. Rem. b. This class of verbs has a considerable tendency to adopt the vocalization, and even the consonantal spelling of verbs T\"b (§ 44): 1) vocalization, e. g. 1 Sam. 22. 2, 2 K. 2. 21, Deat. 88. 59, § 38. LAMED 'ALEPH VERBS. 93 Jer. 51. 34. 2) spelling, Gen. 23. 6, 1 Sam. 6. 10; 10. 6; 85. 33, 2 Sam. 3. 8. 3) inf. cons, in t. Lev. 12. 4, Ex. 31. IS. Rem. c. Only a single example occurs of a perf. pass, inflected in a manner to indicate its vowel, nriNi"^ Ezek. 40. 4. The evidence being so limited, it is perhaps better to retain e (gere) in the Paradigm. Rem. d. Vav convers. with the perf. does not usually throw the tone forward in this class of verbs, as flNSD^ Gen. 17. 19; 18. 26. Rem. e. WitH suff., impf. ^iiJSD'; &o., imper. ''i^'i'\>, § 31. 4. 1. 2. Nouns from verbs S"^. First declension. Second declension. Third declension, abs. »yi «"3i?o «^3 «Bn «S'' cons. »yi «":!?'? )) n w,t fe^- suff. B;«ii?o pi- niN^s D^«"3i?a n^«b3 D^«Bn n-'^s'' cons. ni«2s '^'JiPO (^«b3) ^NBH niKS'i fern. (host) assembly) (prison) (sin) The quiescent retains the long vowel before it even in; the cons, sing., though the heavy suffix admits the short vowel. The long vowel often remains before the quiescent even, in the cons. plur. In the fern, the n is apt to surrender its vowel to the preceding cons., as fiNS"' for n«s'' § 21. to find N3» to sin «Bn to create «"I2 to lift up «to3 tocalljj^^p tobefullNbo to hate »p to prophecy j*'^^-^*-' read j ( Sith. te befalj «ip a wonder N^Bi outgoing I NSIfi pi. tm and oth. meet J I to journey, de-camp J?DJ journeying yDD to heal KBT r^e ^OMSe was full of smoke ]^)l tV%'n Sbfi The house was filled with smoke „ „ ^^Di He filled the house with smoke ]\^)l IT;?!! NpK) Rule. Stative verbs (i. e. those describing a condition of the subject) subordinate to themselves La the accus- the noun that sup- 94 § 38. LAMED 'ALEPH VERES. plements the description. When they become active (in Pi. or Hiph. §§ 26, 27) they take two accusatives. Such verbs are those expressing the idea of fulness (to he full, satisfied, to swarm, flow with, he covered or clothed with &c.) and want (to want, be bereaved, &c.). EXEECISE. TRANSLATE. ,Sin»S33n ,,1K')P ,^^i!^)>?^ ,^«^™ ,Qt:«l3t|l ,»WF) j^";?? DsriK KID'' -n2:x-nx Dsb ht'Ssi ^stKln I'^sa-bx spy -njassi sniPi': ikb "3 rriMto b^'nte': ?]ba ^ai<»5 2 : a^w jn-^nrisa ^Mi^s'a minn iso biian pan nax 3 jy^i ax "3 aits "by ^ass'i tisiti bxiTD'' "51^4 :sini assembly, nSJJ counsel, T\yfS sleep. These words, however, inflect after the manner of the first declension, § 18. The nouns with m preformative, § 30, are of the form nbia fern. n"J^10 (§ 29. 2) from r's; 3B1D from vjj (i. e. mam =md, may=mi, as in Hiph.), and j>3» when the initial letter is assimilated. Eem. a. In Hithp. the syllable Mth is so distinct from the root that it is scarcely felt to form part of the word. A few forms appear with w as Vll^iiri from yij to know. The Hoph. occasionally has 3 for il, as yilH, Lev. 4. 23. Eem. h. Verbs forming the impf. and related parts by rejection of the first radical do not constitute a numerous class, but are words of very common occurrence. Those most frequently met with are: — J?T to know, "h^ to bear, SSJ to go out, HT to go down, ^^) to sit; and ^Tn to go, which derives the parts in question from ^V\ itself not found. Impf. of )!'['' is J;T, imp. J?'^, inf. nji^.* ^ The presence of the unchangeable e is not very easily accounted for. It may have arisen from ay, although the y hardly ever appears iu writing (Mio. 1. 8) ; the i may either be primary, i. e. iy=t, or it may have arisen from e by thinning. § 39. PE YOD AND PE VAV VERBS. 97 Bern. c. The form 3b) is the one proper to stative verbs; and most verbs of the class are stative, though there are -i few actives. Examples are: B'SJ to be dry, ^11) to be xveary, Vi'V to fear, ^^'^ to sleep, |>KJ 'o counsel, ^j5J to bum (also 3 a)), V^V (also ya-resh) to possess, inherit, HT to throw. Inf. of X^J is HST. Examples of infin. and imper. retaining the initial y are rather rare, and are chiefly from verbs doubly weak, as the verbs to fear, to throw. These parts rather follow the forms of 3 a), as B'T to The rare infin. cons, n^l to be able, fltf'Sl to dry, Gen. 8. 7, is met with in these verbs. Kem. d. Proper ^"S verbs are: pi) to suck, bv (Hiph.) to howl, DD^ (impf. and Hiph.) to be good, )D^ (Hiph.) to go to the right, yp"* (impf.) to awake, and others. Kem. e. Verbs assimilating the first radical are: 3S^ (Hiph.) to place, J^Jf (Hiph.) to spread, flSJ to bum, &e. They mostly have a sibilant as second radical. The general remark may be made that the various classes of ''"& verbs have become considerably confused, and in the impff. and re- lated parts, and the Hiph. &o., shew a great tendency to borrow forms from one another. The individual facts must be learned by reading or from the Concordance. tobeableb^l perf. Qal; impf. br (Hoph.?) to add l]P1 perf. Qal; impf. *)''pi^ Hiph. and she bore again (lit. "added to bear", or "added and bore") rrB f)Dirii EXEECISE: PAUSE AND TRANSLATE. ,12^155 ,'aj^5s; ^j^-^isn ^j^-j^n ,prfr? .fisb? ,tm ,5^ xtff; ,tni ,D5TT ,a^sa ,y2n ,^nin^i ,niinn j^T^ina .ip^in ,n;w^x'\ T • iim m-r ^ijj; ^ai<*5 .'WFiTBlb rs-tn y^^n"i^« ^^ f^ri'? ^ The verb very readily subordinates to itself in the ace. its own ^ Ur of the Chaldees. 98 § 40. 'ayin vav and tod vebbs. • T -T T T"' -:~ "J S T IVT • • •• ib-na3i nx nsb TS.'in "n DS'^as^ niyrf nas^ lin^biabii ^isb '^ Infin. abs.=the man asked (why the man asked). The "straiUy" of E. V. is false, see § 27. ^ H particle of interrogation. § 49. ^ JIS. And the ark went upon the face of the waters. And we went through all that great and terrible wilderness. And they said tinto her, Wilt thou go with this man? and she said I will go. And we said, We cannot (impf.) go down. And thou shalt remember all the way which Jehovah thy God made-thee-go in the wilder- ness, to know that which is in thy heart. And the man opened the doors of the house and went out to go on (dot.) his way. And the women said unto her when she bore her son, Fear not for thou hast borne a son. Behold I have heard that there is com in Egypt, go down thither and buy us a little food. And the Lord said unto him, Go not down to Egypt, dwell in the land which I shall say unto thee. Let them give to me a place in one of the cities of the country (field) that I may dwell (cohort.) there, why should thy servant dwell in the royal city (city of the kingdom)? And he was afraid and said, How terrible is this place ! And he said, My son shall not go down with you», for his brother is dead and he alone is left, and should mischief befall^ him in the way in which ye shall go then shall ye bring down my grey-hairs in sorrow to Sheol. 1 ny see § 49. 2 Vav with perf. § 40. 'AYIN VAV AND YOD VERBS. The principles stated in § 9 should be well understood here. By § 9. 3, such forms as per£ and part, qawam, maweth, tateob, § 22, become qSm, mith, tob; so part. qawum=qiim, and infin. qawom =qom. Again, by § 9. 2, forms like infin. q'wum = qum; impf. i/aqwum = i/d-q&m; Hiph. hiqwim=he-qiin;-'B»ph. hiiquiam=h{lqam. These general laws explain the following facts: — 1. As in Pe Vav and Yod verbs the w and y forms have become greatly mixed, those with tv having very much the § 40. 'AYIN VAV AND YOD VERBS. 99 preponderance. Except in impf. Qal and related parts the forms with n> and y completely coincide. 2. The weak middle letter always either falls out or unites in sound with the vowel of the form, hence the stems form monosyllables with the same vowels in most places as are in the regular verb, as perf. DJ?, nn, Hiph. D">i3ri. The Niph., however, has o, from wa, Dii?5=D1pi ; and in the impf. Qal and related parts, the fundamental sounds of these verbs, u and ?, always maintain themselves, as Dlp^, ]''5J. 3. As the stem forms a monosyllable, the preformative letters stand in the open pretone and have tone-long vowels (chiefly a, as impf. Qal w^\, perf. Niph. nipiJ; e from i in Hiph. D''i?n), which, of course, are lost when the tone shifts. Hoph. has u. 4. With inflectional afformatives (except tern, ten), the compression of the stem retains the tone on the penult, as na^ she stood. 5. The vowels i u being so characteristic of these verbs, a great effort is made to give them expression ; but as they cannot stand in a shut syllable with two consonants follow- ing them, § 5. Rem. &, a vowel is inserted between the stem and the consonantal afformatives, aud i u remain in the open syllable. The inserted vowel is t in perf., and 6 in impf. If no vowel be inserted, i, u become e («), o in the shut syllable. 6. The ordinary form of the intensive is generally avoided. The intensive is usually formed by doubling the final letter, as DDIp pass. QDIp {aw=6). § 26 Rem. c.^ Bern. a. In these verbs the infin. cons, is assumed as root, because it is the simplest form in which the characteristic i or m is found. Bem.i. In Hiph. VJ? and ''"J? coincidejin the other parts, e.g. Niph., Po'el (and Hoph.?), the forms employed are exclusively those of \y. Only in impf. Qal and related parts is there any divergence.^ * The supposition made above, that these verbs are triliteral roots, ■with a weak middle letter, which sometimes falls out, and sometimes melts into the vowels beside it, offers to appearance the simplest ex- planation of their forms. It is not necessary, however, to suppose any historical period of the language, during which the words existed, even under inflection, in the unabridged trUiteral form. ^ Several things, such as the analogy of other Shemitic dialects, the 100 § 40. 'AYIN VAV AND YOD VEEBS. Bern. c. Pretonio a, is the ordinary preformative vowel in impf. and Niph. The intrans. i (=e in pretone), appears only in \S\11 (i. e, tJ'n';); "ll«; 2 Sam. S. 32 is probably nipJi., so Gen. 34. 15. In Hiph. and Hoph. hiqqim, huqqam occasionally appear for he- qtm &o., as ri^an from IIU, to set, place, ITiDn Is. 36. 18, Jer. 38. 22. Bern. d. The vowel o is inserted in perf. Niph.; and generally in perf. Hiph. Siph. sometimes follows reg. verb, IJBin Ex. 20. 25, Deut. 14. 28; particularly hiph. of ffllD, Numb. 14. 15, Is. 14. 30, Hos. 2. 5, Ex. 1. 16. The form ribjjn with e for t also occurs, Ex. 19. 23, Num. 31. 28, Ex. 26. 30. The vowel e is generally inserted in impf, Qal, and occasionally in impf. Hiph. In Niph. the stem o becomes H immediately before the tone, but sometimes remains, Ez. 11. 17; 20. 43 &c. The origin of the inserted o and i is obscure. Probably these vowels arose out of the a and e sounds in which the perf. and impf. originally terminated. § 31. Bern. e. The juss. in Kal is Dj?J, in hiph. Dj?J; with vav BjJ^and Dj3'\ Pinal gutt. take a, yi\\ Is. 7. 2, ID^J Gen. 8. 13.— Inf. cons, is sometimes Dip, Is. 7. 2. appearance of such words as 3^K to be hostile to, ^j^JJ to be weary, in which y is moveable, and the existence of numerous primary nouns with y as middle letter (§ 41), make the existence of the class of ^"Tf stems certain. The class, however, shews a great tendency to pass over into V'V, and very few verbs can now be held vnVa. certainty to belong to it. In addition to the two verbs just mentioned and some denominatives from nouns ''"J?, the following words may be considered examples: l^t to seethe, |>''S to glance, y^)!} to grow gray, "y^ to plaster — ^besides others. There is another class of verbs which, though sometimes reckoned "'"^ words, are more probably verbs V'J^ with certain abnormal forms. The general peculiarity of the class is that they have a set of forms in Qal and a set in Hiph., and the two sets are used without difference of signi- fication. Perhaps the simplest explanation is given by assuming Miph. to be the primary form. The initial T\ may easily fall off, and the steni then falls back into the Qal, and, not unnaturally, developes new Qal forms. Thus |^3n becomes |''a, and a new perf. and part, ]3 are then developed in addition, and even new impff. of the form ^13\ In this way the peculiar perf. inflection JJli^Sl, which two or three verbs exhibit, may be readily explained — it is a Hiph. without the preformative letter. See Ewald, ieAr6.§ 127. A different explanation is suggested by Bottcher, Ausfuhrl. Lehrb. § 1141 foil. The principal verbs belonging to this class are the following, which should be seen in the Concordance : ]^2 understand, yi judge, ^b lodge (the night), 15*^0 depaH, Sn contend, yitf sing, n''\lf lay, JVIlf set (also Vi, h^n, ty^ty be glad, n''\lf think). § 40. 'AYIN VAV AND YOD VERBS. 101 Eem. f. Very rarely the regular intensive is formed; in one or two cases the middle letter hecomes y, D*j7. Sometimes the whole stem is douhled. § 26 Bern. c. Rem. g. In the perf. vav conv. projects the tone even in 3 f. s., and 3 c. pi., as Tib\)\ and she will stand. The rule stated above in 4 as to the place of Tone does not apply to the Participles, djj, ilfijj. The emphatic imper. is Hfilp, but in close connection with a foUow- i ng word beginning with a gutt. riB^lp, e. g. before TViTl'' (pron. 'adhonai) Ps. 3. 8, of. Jud. 4. 18, Ps. 67. 9. See Ex. 6. 22, Is, 11. 2, Gen. 86. 10. to arise D!ip' establish. Eiph. to rest m to place Hiph. to die mm to run rn set n-B' WORDS FOR PRA.CTICE. to return D^B'! restore Hiph.f to be high DO to be ashamed t!^13 to come K13 to establish ]13 to depart "11D to flee Wl to hunt n« to melt m to shine lis to contend an Eiph. Pol. EXERCISE: PARSE AND TRANSLATE. ,Dh^ ,n5^3!ifflp ,^a*iSn jD^ns ,!inoi .nxa^i ,nb.iD ,mD ,d3 .01^ ,'T'K'' ,^^hiBni ,Mi22'''iiri .lisn .i^^ib ,r!ah ,'rx\^m "T ; ' -T ' ■ • -I- ' T "-:'i •' t' tt- ' t t jttnan .xa^ia .nssii^ ,n5a^ffl5 ,n«^nn ,iTfin-bx .. . J y 'TV-; I ' T • T ' T • T ' V T - npfc5 ^ss ^3 n5ai«!Tb>^ sn^ia is anb bisn tb^ f^3?Ta T - T T • T T -; T V I ; - vv - I V - " " : -b? d^sa b^siHn-ni* s'-sx; ■'ssri "sns'i 2 tninan ^srbM -bx lansn i5as*i 3 :D^52i^n nnfia nto-b3 nrnab v^^T TT - V - • IT T - - - . T T T " - ; ) V T T £l5b nt'o nDi^n n«^5a sibi 4 Ji*inari mixa-isib^ ni|»n fr'» sa^i nnp^i ii^ tibiasi nnnn-bi* nb-bs< mani nbati T "T- T vIt •- T - ; •■- T " - V - T T- t; - iijSi» nw^i x^p«i ^bip "Sa'-'^na %"i^i^ 5 ;napn-b» rb^ irpi<* Kis 1? fibsx 1153 nsni jns^nn «s:;i d:j5 "b^x ^ The order here is uncommon ; nothing usually precedes the infin. abs. •when used in this way, § 27 ; the present order arises from the expression being a quotation. The Serpent puts ^7 before what God affirms. * "And it came to pass". See § 45. ^ On this word see note p. 17. * This word takes suff. of the plur, noun, exclusively in all persons except 1st and optionally in 1st. 102 § 41. NOUNS PBOM 'AYIN VAV AND YOD. And they fled the way of the wilderness. Depart not from- after Jehovah, hut (and) ye shall serve him with all your heart. And Noah went in, and his sons and his wife and his sons' wives unto the ark. And he took not from his hand that which he had brought. I will surely-retum (inf. abs.) unto thee (f.). And he said, Jehovah my God let the soul of this boy return. And he arose in the morning and saddled his ass and went with the princes of Mo'ab. And he called the man (dat.) and said unto him, How have I sinned against thee (dat.) that thou hast brought upon me and upon my kingdom a great sin? And his wife said to him, If Jehovah had wished* to kill us he would not have taken* from our hand a burnt offering. And the woman went out to meet the captain of the king's host and she said. Turn in^ my lord, turn in unto me, fear not ; and he turned in unto her to the tent. And Jehovah said unto his servant, Take all the heads of the people and hang them up for Jehovah before ' the sun that the fierceness of the anger of Jehovah may turn from Israel. And it shall be if thou shalt at-all-forget* Jehovah thy God and go after other gods and serve them, I testify* against thee this day that ye shall surely-perish.* * Perfect. ^ IID. » 133. * Infin. abs. § 41. NOUNS FROM "AYIN VAV AND YOD. First declension. See § 18. 1 Djj {qatvam) plur. D^ejJ cons. io|3; fern, nojj 2 flO (maweth) « n^fiD „ ino &c. 3 ma (tawob) w D'^nits „ ^aiB &c. 4 "iHD (satvur) n &c. ^ &c. 5 n''lJ' (sayim) » &c. „ &c. 8 D1p» (maqtvam) n waipo &c. (nua « ) 1) cnwa &c. ni3» fern. nij«D (now?), njno Cayin yod). § 41. NOUNS PROM 'AYIN VAV AND TOD. 103 Second declension. See § 29. A class. I class. TJ class. ahs. ii« niB^ njfe none DID p!|t5^ (pIB*) cons. •fl« „ nio (i. e. nil?) » DW „ suff. niK „ •«nia » ^P» „ plur. nn.is Dn.je; n-'fiio » n-'pw n''j?3B; cons. niK niK' ini» » ^DID •'plE^ (light) (ox) (death) n (horse) (street) A class. I class. TJ class. abs. i^« nVl ^in b^a none cons. T« m(i.e.n'«i) ^^n &c. » suff. '«T'« wt •'bin n )] plur. &c. n-'fin tih-n » 11 cons. ' buck tS'^n. calamity TiS „ egg ^•''3 pi, bosom p'/. (D^pi';=) D'O^, § 9. This word is very irregular in treating its a as merely tone-long. (The word B't^l head probably=t!'«"3 i. e. B'S"], plur. D"'E'K» EXERCISE. TRANSLATE. And they heard the voice of Jehovah walking in the midst of the trees (sing.) of the garden and the man and his wife hid-them- selves. Behold I am old I know not the day of my death. Li those days there- was-not a king in Israel, eoery man did* the thivg upright in his own eyes. Ye shall not die for God knoweth (part.) that, in the day of your eating of the tree, then {vav conv. perf.) your eyes shall be opened. And Noah awoke from his wine and knew what his younger (little) son had done to him. And the prophet said unto her, And thou, arise, go to thy house, when thy feet come to-the-city, then (vav conv.) the boy shall die. And he 1 n'tOVl iwpf. § 46. § 42. DOUBLE "AYIN VERBS. 105 ofifered the ram of the burnt-offering and the priests, the sons of Aaron,^ leant their hands upon the head of the ram. And the men feared to return to their houses. Arise (f.), shine, for thy light is come and the glory of the Lord is risen upon thee ; for the abundance of the sea shall be converted^ unto thee and the forces {sin^.) of the gentiles shall come unto thee. § 42. DOUBLE 'AYIN VEEBS. Verbs Double 'Ayin so entirely resemble in tbeir inflec- tion verbs 'Ayin Vav, that it is best to treat them imme- diately after this class: — 1) As in verbs 'Ayin Vav the stems are monosyllabic, ex- cept where an unchangeably long vowel or double letter in the form requires the presence of a third stem-letter, e. g. participles and infin. abs. Qal, Pi'el, Poel &c., as 312D, aap, aniD. The vowels are those of the regular verb except that in Hiph. the vowel has not risen to i but remains e (or a); see § 27 Rem. a; e. g. Niph. SDi, Hiph. yan. 2) Again, the stems being monosyllabic, the preforma- tive letters stand in open pretone and have tone-long vowels, precisely as in 'Ayin Vav, as impf. Qal 2b^ 3) The double letter shews itself with all inflectional afformatives ; and the tone (except in participles) is on the penult,' as aoi f. nSDi. 4) Before the afformatives beginning with a consonant a vowel is inserted, viz. in the perfects d, and in the impff. and related parts, e, as niiD. 5) The tone-long e 5, which under the tone maintained themselves before the double letter, when they lose the tone become the sharp i u, (See Table § 6. 3.), as 2 pi. fem. imper. n^i^. 6) The regular Intensive is quite common. Other forms ' There are exceptions to this law about the place of tone, particulavly in parts with vocalic terminations. 106 § 42. DOUBLE 'AYIN VERBS. of the Intensive are Pd'el, and Pilpel, which are also much in use. See § 26. Rem. c} Bem.a. Stative verbs. The stative e of perf. Qal is always sharpened to a (see § 22 Bern. 6); a very few perff. appear with o, Gen. 49. 23, Job 24. 24. In impf. final a and preformative i (i. e. e in open pre- tone), are regular, as b\}l, or with first rad. doubled TB";, Gen. 16.4; 47. 19, Deut. 19. 6, Is. 7. 4, Gen. 21. 11. Bern. b. In Niph'al a is the ordinary preformative vowel, but i (e when prolonged) also appears. Ez. 25. 3, Mai. 2. 5, Is. 57. 5. The final e of Niph. is usually sharpened to a; but e is found, and even extends itself to the perf. and part, Is. 49. 6, 1 Sam. 15. 9, Ps. 68. 3. By imitation of verbs 'Ai/in Vav the Niph. has occasionally o through- out; and it may be remarked in general that the two classes 'Ayin Vav and Double 'Ayin shew an inclination to adopt forms from one. another. 1) In impf. ^ appears. Is. 42. 4, Prov. 29. 6. 2) In niph. o. Is. 84. 4, Am. 3. 11, Ez. 29. 7. 3) In hiph. t, Ps. 38. 10, Jnd. 3. 24.— The perf. hiph. is often in a, Is. 8. 23, 2 K. 23. 15; so with gutt. Deut. 28.52. to be light ^p St. to measure ID to be bitter 10 si. to begin ^flBipft. to be silent D1 1 to tingle h'ist. to be trodden Tijf. to waste away pO iVtpA. Note. Verbs marked 1 double the first radical. * As m'Ayin Vav verbs the question may be raised whether these verbs be properly biliteral stems shewing an impulse towards triliteration which gratifies itself in the duplication or repetition of the second stem letter, or whether they be real triliterals now undergoing a process of contraction. If the second hypothesis be adopted, the contractions may be explained by considering the second radical a weak letter and applying to it the laws 2, 3 of § 9. Several considerations, however, are in favour of the other hypothesis, which is more natural in itself: 1) Sometimes the duplication of the 2n(l radical does not appear, even under inflection, as, perf. ^iOf) for WISJ?, impf. IBl^ for \ISi)\ And 2) on the other hand the impulse towards strengthening the stem by triliteration often finds satisfaction in dupli- WOBDS FOB PBACTK to plunder »a to roll bi to be hot unst. to curse "IK to pity P to hold a feast jn to be evil Tist. to destroy Dli'(l) to turn 30(1) to be soft y^ St. to be ended Dm to curse 3p 1 § 43. NOUNS FEOM DOUBLE 'AYIN VERBS. 107 EXERCISE: PARSE THESE WORDS. ,^P51 '^V) 'i-^'^i .s'^P) .^a .10t'5 .^i^? .Bi^a^l ,*i^I3 ,^3ifa ^Pisari'i'i -jm nffl»-n» ■'ran') irj^is-b? ^i^ta-bs i^ns« ^sni^ .Qnb snb;; nlDn^ y^jjia shb nixri bnn 2 minnx ^tii^-n^' --ifflK b3 ^i^a-b!$ nin^ ^53k»5 Q'l^ari-bx dsn-n^ i^i^i 3 bbi nib inii^ a^sn sbin pb; iiass n:an-ja iiiiaba pb; DTa D^ppb53n ^BD^ ^ri',1 :niFnaV i'?12i-b? s^sriios Djn^S'isi-b? W13 nsn ^n; bbi iij^t^ nisa labia onV'^jj ;i«!ip* "asi^ "b n38^pn-i5i« ^n'-bx ^laxni 4 :D^a nintib Dp^ni ''psbn mba ^?ii| n^ ^b ■'■nTri lan ^3 sia ^b ^ Inf. Cons. nntJ' , heat Dh, cold 1j3, statute njP^J. f na^ iDB^-nx !i«ip '?'?'!ll ^•^- with no helping vowel are possible only when last letter is a mute (§ 5 Bem. d, end), otherwise the forms 731 or 735 must be used. 2. The common verb iTn to be, has some irregularities, — which may be given: — 1) The gutt. when initial takes hat. s^ghol, as imper. ,T7J. 2) With any prefixed letter the gutt., when without a vowel, takes simple sh^va, and the prefix Mreq, as impf. n^,n\ 3) Apocopated impf. is 0'T.=) NT., V% V\1 ^^- See nouns of 2nd declens. impf. qal "^r. impf. hiph. rhyi imper. hiph. Thin impf niph. n^V. impf. pi. ^)^\ imper. pi. nV? impf. qal, hiph. r^)T. impf. qal "iJT. 114 § 45, APOCOPATED FORMS AND NOUNS OF VERBS LAM. HE. The verb n^n to live, has mostly the same peculiarities. Rem. Yav before the imp. sing, takes -. as iTHI, and of course K in 1st sing, impf , iTilS. The preform, letter always takes Mdheg. 3. Nouns from verbs T\"b. First and third declensions. abs. ;ni]5a nij? nVj; "^ ns; fem. ns; cons. nii?D n3|3 rhv nij' n^\ ns^. suff. liipo 'h^ 3 m. !ini;?a -in^jj 3 /: nijpo n^— O^JJ pi n''ii?o o"'Vjj n-iB; nis; cons. 'tt*5 4 tsra-xn ^as ^'2y^ nsn") itiiii inapfi ns^b^ n^rt^ i?s: s J^'briK^ ilina bain^i ^stb^j ^^rn-a TB^ij !i^aii*5 aib nap; ^?n T'M D^nx nzjpa ^?h i^a n^i. -bK niri"' xi);! 8 jjis-'M "s'^a n'T'^12 ^rrn i«;-b» in?rbK naT^ QTB li^i ni^.Tr! y:j«n-rix inx ?{y'i|b nrs";: D'^ia^ :i''bKri!!5'^sr!ri;ri''b ^ Por this 8uffix see § 2. 3. 3), § 19. ^ Japhet; Shem. And I saw in my dream and behold seven good cows and they stood upon the bank of the river. And the man of God stretched out his hand and brought up the frogs as the Lord had commanded him; and Pharaoh saw the plagues and he feared icith a great fear. And Adam knew his wife and she conceived and bare Qayin ; and she conceived again and bare his brother Hebel, and Hebel was a shepherd of flocks; and it came to pass when they were in the field that Qayin rose up against (unto) his brother and slew him. And his daughters spake one to another saying, Let us make our father drink wine; and he drank and was drunken. Walk thou before me and be perfect. And God opened her eyes and she saw a well of water, and she went and filled the bottle with-water^ and made the boy drink. And the captain of the host said, "Who ever shall smite Qiryath §epher and take it, then (vav conv.) I will give him my daughter to wife. And the watchmen saw a man coming out of the city and they said unto him, Shew-us the entrance of the city and we will deal mercifully with thee ;^ and he shewed-them the entrance of the city, and they smote th& city with the edge of sword but the man they let go ; and he went into the land of the Hittim and built a city and called its name Luz. Note on doubly weak and defective verbs. 1. Many verbs have more than one weak letter. They are mostly N" / or n"? with some other peculiarity. Some common verbs are these : — 1) »,"b and T'B. «b^i to lift, impf. t(^\, pi. ^»\tf> (§ 7 note 1); imp. m, suff. ^ntiiti', •'i!i«fc?j inf. c. n«l2>, n«lj'3 &o., but m\in,^ rarely »^i. § 45. APOCOPATED FOEMS AND NOONS OF VERBS LAM. HE. 1 17 2) K"^ and V'B. «S; go out, impf. N^;, imp. NS, inf. o. n«S, nN?"?. Hiph. K^sin, nKsin &o. 3) «"■? and VJ?. «ia to come, perf. «3, riN3 &o., impf. «DJ, inf., imp. K13, part. K3. Hiph. ^"'^ilf, JJN3ri &o., but usually JjS''3n &o. before suff. 4) n"^ and ]"S. nOJ fo stretch, impf. nBI, apoo. tS^ t3',5. Hiph. nSi to smife, nsn, impf. ns^, apoo. ^^, '^51i imp. '^'3i inf. HlSn, part. TQIi. 5) (T^ and N"B. n2!|J 6e «ot7?%, impf. HSt^S apoo. «5h-'?«, Pr. 1. 10. n^K to advise, "Ij;, 1W to fear, 2T, asi to place, DBJ, niS to Wow, nis;^, ttjj; to eouer. Henoe one root supplements itself often from another. In many verbs also the forms in Qal have fallen into disuse, and the Qal supplements itself out of the other conjugations. 1) B'la be ashamed, see Parad. § 40. Hiph. tJ'^50 "^eg., and also B'-'Oin from B*2\ 2) 31t3 be good, perf., part., inf. 3113 ; but impf. 36''^, and hiph. yp^rj from 3a\ 3) '=l'?0 ^0 go, perf., inf. abs. ^iTfJ, part. ^7il ; impf. tJT, inf. o. 713^, suff. ''03^, imp. "sf}, hiph. tj'^^in, from ']yi\ Later style forms impfs and inf. cons, from ^vij. 4) "li^ to fear, perf., part.' lilj; impf. Ili;, imp. IW Job. 19. 29, from 115. £) to; 6e a6fe, inf. abs. ^13;, inf. cons, n^";, impf. ^SSC (hoph.). 6) fpl to add, perf., part., in Qal; hiph. *i''pin in perf., impf., and inf.* An imp. IBD Is. 29. 1, Jer. 7. 21 (from ilBD? of. Is. 30. 1). 7) ^{51 to fljoa^e, only impf. ^^j?". in Qal; hiph. }>''j5n perf., impf., imp., infln., from ]'1p. 8) WB to /aK, perf., inf. abs., part., in Qal; impf., inf. cons, from Niph. 9) B'ii to draw near, impf., imp., inf. cons, in Qal, but perf. and part, borrowed from Niph., which has only these two parts. 10) nnj to lead, perf., imper. in Qal; impf. and inf. cons, in Hiph., ■which has also perf. twice. 11) yp_i be alienated, perf. 3. f. nj?]?? Ez. 83. 18, impf. 3. f. VpP Jer. 6. 8, from yp^. 12) im to pour (intr.), only impf. "^Fl"! in Qal; in Niph. ^F\i perf. and part. 13) nty^ to drink, inQal,butHiph.ni3B^ri to give to drink,iromnp\^. 118 § 46. THE TWO VERBAL POEMS, PERFECT AND IMPERFECT. § 46. THE TWO VERBAL FORMS, PERFECT AND IMPERFECT. In § 20 only so much was said regarding the Tenses of the Verb as seemed absolutely necessary for understanding the Exercises. A full discussion of the subject belongs to the syntax; but the sections on the Verb can hardly be closed without some additional notes on the simple verbal forms. 1, The Perfect. The Perfect expresses a completed action. 1. Now in reference to time such an action may be: — 1) one just completed from the point of view of the present (the preter definite) ; as, Against thee only have I sinned inSBn ; exx. Gen. 3. 11 eaten, 4. 1 have gotten, Ex. 5. 14 have ye not fulfilled? Or 2) one completed in the indefinite past (the preter indefinite) ; as, In the beginning God created K"i3 ; exx. Gen. 4. 1 knew. Job 1. 1. Or 3) one already completed from the point of view of another past act (pluperfect) ; as. And God saw every thing that he had made nl!'^; exx. Gen. 2.2,3; 3. 1; 19. 27. Or finally, on the opposite side, 4) one completed from the point of view of another action yet fu- ture (the future perfect); as, I will draw for thy camels also until they have done drinking niRB^ iV? ; exx. Gen. 48. 6; Mic. 5. 2. It will make no difference in the usage of the perf. if the completed actions, instead of being expressed absolutely, as in the above sentences, should be conceived and ex- pressed conditionally, or if they should have no existence except in conception: as, (1) Jehovah my God if I have done this w'^jj n« Ps. 7. 4 ; (3) If ye had not ploughed with my heifer ana^nn Jud. 14. 18; Would God that we had died !|in» \b Numb! 14. 2, exx. Judg. 6. 3 ; Is. 1. 9 ; (4) // Jehovah shall wash away ynn the filth of the daughter of Zion, Is. 4. 4 ; exx. Gen. 43. b &c. 2, The perf. never expresses any action but one conceived as completed, but a difference in the manner of conceiving actions makes the perf. used in several cases where the present is rather employed in English: — 1) In the case of § 46. THE TWO VEEBAL FORMS, PERFECT AND IMPERFECT. 1 1 9 actions of frequent occurrence — actions which have leen often experienced or observed (perf. of experence) ; as, The sparrow findeth a house riKSD (E. V. hath found), Ps. 84. 4 ; exx. Ps. 10. 3 ; 33. 13 ; Provj 11. 2, 8. This usage is naturally particularly common in comparisons, Job 7. 9; and when general truths are expressed negatively, Ps. 15. 3 foil. 2) In the case of the actions or conditions expressed by stative verbs, § 22 Rem. a. What the language seizes upon in this case is not the fact that the condition expressed by the verb is one that continues, but rather the fact that it is a condition that has come into complete existence and realization, and hence the perf. is made use of to express it; as, I know ifiJ^T that thou wilt be king, 1 Sam. 24. 21 ; I hate ^n«i^ all workers of iniquity, § 38 Exer. ; so, I re- member, in-)5j § 16 Exer. &c.; exx. Gen. 6. 13; 18. 13; 27. 14; 32. 10 (E.' V'); Numb. 11. 5; Deut. 12. 31. To this class belongs the verb to be, when am &c. is expressed. 3) A lively imagination is very apt to conceive things which are really future, especially if their occurrence be certain, as already done, and to describe them in the perf. This happens often in making promises or threats, and in the language of contracts, as. The field give I thee iprii Gen. 23. 11 ; And if not, I will take it ^PiXXph 1 Sam. 2, 16, exx. Gen. 4. 23 ; 9. 13 ; 17. 20 ; Deut. 15. 6 ; Ruth 4. 3. This usage is very common in the elevated language of the Prophets, before whom the future lay so clear and certain as to be made the basis of new exhortation (prophetic perf.) ; Is. 9. 5 foil., 10. 28 foil. Rem. As the language has no perfect or aorist participle, the perf. itself is used in subordinate clauses -which serve for adjectival or participial descriptions. Such clauses should be translated by the participle in English. The use of the perf. to express momentary actions, and for ex- pressing the sudden, sharp, occurrence of any action, seems a variety of its use in 2. 3), 1 Sam. S. 16. II. The Imperfect. The impf. expresses an action conceived as entering upon, or going on towards, accomplishment. 1. Such an action may be: — 1) A single action, going on and unfinished in the present (present); as, Whence come 120 § 46. THK TWO VERBAL POKMS, PEEFECT AND IMPEEPECT. ye 1^^aJJ Josh. 9.8; exx. Ex. 5. 15; Jud. 17. 9; Ps. 2.4. Or 2) A single action going on in the past, the two being conceived as contemporaneous (presens preteriti),— in Prose chiefly when the section of time with which the action coincides and to which it is parallel and present, is pro- minently defined by a particle ; as. Then sings Moses tb'; hj! Ex. 15. 1; exx. Deut. 4. 41 ; Josh. 8. 30; 1 Kings 16. 2l'. ' 2. The kind of progression or imperfection and unfinished condition of the action may consist in its frequent repeti- tion: — 1) Either in the present; as. It is said to this day, *1»k; Gen. 22. 14; Take of all food which is eaten, § 35 Exerc. This usage is very common in comparisons and in the statement of general truths founded in the nature of things ; as, A wise son maketh a glad father piBfe'' Prov. 10. 1 ; exx. Numb. 11. 12; Deut. 1. 31; Jud. 10. 4;"2 Sam. 5. 8; Ps. 1. 2 foil. Prov. pass. Or 2) In the past; as. Thus did Job continually TitSVI Job. 1. 5. This usage is of very frequent occurrence, exx. Gen. 2. 6 went up; 6.4 used to come in; Numb. 11. 5 used to eat; 1 Sam. 1. 7; 2. 19; Ps. 95. 10. 3. The imperf. is used for the expression of the future — that which is conceived as entering upon accomplish- ment: — 1) This may be a future from the point of view of the real present; as, A prophet w///the Lord raise up unto you D''i?; Deut. 18. 18, see § 21 Exerc. Or 2) It may be a future from any other point of view assumed ; as. He took his eldest son that was to reign i^'' in his stead, 2 Kings 3. 27. 4. The usage in 3. 2) may be taken as the transition to a common use of the impfi". in which it serves for the ex- pression of that class of dependent actions and those shades of relation among acts and thoughts, for which we rather use the conditional moods (esp. the potential). Such actions are strictly future in reference to the assumed point of relation, and the simple impf. sufficiently expresses them. For ex., Of every tree of the garden thou mayest eat ^SK'n § 35 Exerc. ; Could we (were we to) know yiin, that he would say, Bring down your brother, § 39 Exerc. ; Six days § 47. THE ADJECTIVE. COMPARISON. 121 Shalt thou (must thou) labour, Ex. 20. 9 ; How shall (should) we sing ? Ps. 137. 4. 5. Oa the same ground the impf. follows particles ex- pressing transition, purpose, result, and the like, as, ']j?n'7 in order that, ]B lest, 13 that &c. The actions introduced by such particles are strictly consequent and future to some- thing just stated. When, however, there is a strong feeling oi purpose, or when it is meant to be strongly marked, then, of course, the moods are employed, § 23 ; just as they are employed to express that class of future actions which we express in the Optative &c. Bern. a. As is the case with the perf., the impf. is very much used in subordinate clauses, which give adjectival or participial descriptions of the subject of the main clause. The participle itself is very little used for this purpose. Bern. b. It must be assumed that the perf. and impf. are entirely distinct in meaning, and that the one is never used for the other or to express the same conception of an act with the other. Bat it may readily happen that two distinct conceptions may be entertained of an action, which may thus be expressed either in the perf. or impf. Thus any general truth for ex. may be conceived on the one side as a thing completed, having been many times realized, and this conception of it would be expres.sed in the perf., 2. 1); or it may be conceived on the other side as a, thing unfinished, ever repeating itself, and to express this view of it, the impf, would be used, 2. 1). III. The consecutive forms have the same variety of use as the simple forms, the consec. impf. corresponding to the simple perf.; and the consec. perf. to the simple impf. § 47. THE ADJECTIVE. COMPAEISON. 1. Comparative Degree. The adjective undergoes no change of termination or vocalization in comparison. The com- parative degree is expressed by the positive followed by the prep. ]p, as, Better than wine ^'Q 31t3, lit. good amay from, or in distinction from mine. 2. Superlative Degree. The superlative is also expressed by the positive raised into a position of isolation, as for 122 § 47. THE ADJECTIVE. COMPAEISON. ex. by having the Art. prefixed, or by being distinguished by a suffix, or by being in the Gen. relation, as He is the greatest, ^nan Kin lit. the great one (among those referred to), V33 IQp the youngest of his sons, D^na the greatest of them. Absolute superlativeness is expressed variously, as by the word nj<0, very, or ni lajj the most abject slave. I am taller than he ^3)31? ''SitJ Hij he is taller than his wife WB^|J/. niNilT and rii3T lan 20000 n-inia"! h^ eighth ••yaB; fourth ■>y_^y] „ &c." ninth ijjiB^n fifth iB^'Dn or ^B^on 1) tenth ^TV'S? § 49. PAETICLES. THEIE SITFFIXES. 1. The particles are mostly nouns, either entire or oftener disintegrated, though some are proper interjectional or demonstrative expressions. Being nouns they must be considered, when in relation to be in the construct state, and the word following themi (or as we say, governed by them) in the Genitive. The case in which, being nouns, they must also stand, will vary according to many circumstances; but as the language does not mark the case endings, this is of less consequence at first. 2. Some particles are so much worn down and feeble that they cannot stand in the sentence alone, but require the support of a noun or pronoun, to which they prefix themselves ; while again others as the precative particle «i are inseparable affixes. 126 § 49. PARTICLES. THEIR SUFFIXES. The punctuation of the important prepositional frag- ments 2, 3, h, ]», and of the conjunction ), has already been given, §§ 14 — 15. Another important inseparable prefix is the interrogative particle n, the pointing of which varies: — a) Its usual pointing is n, as njn is this? b) Before simple sh°va it is n, as ajjon is it little? fre- quently followed by Bag. dirimens, in which case it is not to be distinguished from the Art., as Gen. 17. 17; otherwise it is not unfrequently marked by Metheg; see last Eem. § 6 on p. 17. c) Before Gutturals it is also pointed n, often marked by Metheg, as '^'jisin shall I go ? d) Before Gutt. with qamec it is n, as pjnn whether it be strong? 3. Suffixes to Particles. The following Table will be useful for reference: — § 49. PABTICLES. THEIR SDITIXES. 127 fen p W O Ah O C4 i::- n- o o n- n- n- tz- n- n- o K- n- *n» 'n- «^- «n>* 'H «^i> 1- *r|- *n- Til. *rii. I'.vni V-—, s o n p- l5-|=-»- li #-1 n* IT- n •— a ' — p- ^' s n- n- . to vxrtK V*1fr 5=1h Sin ,Q «a- *! g .32' » X' » X' » «;> , ^ 3fi;< X" ^-^?.^ ^- ?l»r^^ Plfr *-|s «S3 03 tS '''^I v*ni a «Tf IT- 1=- ^ pi. s 43 ^ a *-. CS J3- C- o- c- n- n- o- a- a- n- C' o- jj: o — .£!■ £!- £1. ,e^,fl=- fl rj» rv; o n- .£!■ Si. ^ *; #a' IE- r?- «j pi. s a, p* 03 n- nt- ni* r\f ri" n"- rji. FV F\f FV- FV- n- n- r^ £ 'S O 13 "C 'O •c T\> n- H" n- H^ o n» *7, '^' F-i^E & ?! n — n *— 1 J^- a n- a, a an s 3S' K< nrnr 0) i; d -M c3 3 S eS r" r =, ;^ -so ft B sc-ss- » X' X' X' X- XI- Xr Xr xr x< 5 J>> ^'lLr>!-J>; J>'J>!- il^.JNI J^l J^l J>> ■s'-f" a |5-|=- '- O Jl "" n» n=- n- n- o Q a —a — a, "- I JC- J5 .X JS .X .K .X X' X'X X X c c- C- C" c C c- C- C- C- C" c- CO lir-I=-»- It p n- n. n — r:- sj a *— s »( S=« PC X' J=V Pv- SV rg n a- C S" a- "2 £!» .■s IT- n>- S ^' ^ CO n *— rt *- » X- X- X- X- X- X- X- X- X- X- x- 5 c e- e- e- n; e" & e- e- e- e- e- .■a lE-r^ •- n: p n» ri!- ja '^ r^ St 13 — a< M o j>. ^ JN.J^« JN JNl. J^- J^1.J%1.J^»J^1. j^<-:ir-' -*J jir-i=-»- n: ^-1 n» rv tZ' n- n — n — &b 'J s < s < c «i S << g < .S ^ 2. §45. after, behind, "inN, nni!?; '; TT/n, used im- pers. : he was angry 1^ JTin. anger, f)K 2 (t\i»). anoint to, HB'B; Messiah H^tJ'D 1. another, inS ; one another . . . ^'^Ifi VriN. See § 45. any, (all) ; not any, none, fe. ..^7. appear to, Niph. of see. appearance, nN"lD, § 45. approach to, (draw near), arise to, UVp, % 40. ark, T\2F\, (e firm), ark (of covenant), ]1"l^jl 1. arm, )IV\] f. (generally) ; pi. im, oth. army, b^n § 41, (force). 1 The figures 1, 2, 3 after nouns indicate the Beolensious, 9 130 VOCABULAKT. arrow, yn 2. § 43. as, 3, niS'tO. ascend to, (go up). ashamed be tS'lS, § 40. ashes, ]^'l 2. i. aside turn to, I^D, § 40. ask to, ^KB*, § 36. ass, he-ass "llfiH; she-ass linS 1. assemble, ^ilp Riph,; (gather). assembly, nng 1., Xnjja. atone to, "1B3 Pi. (perf. in e); pass. Pm. ; for ^JJ- avenge to, Dj?} ; Niph. be avenged, avenge oneself, awake to, ]*p'' jje»/. unus. ; impf. W.'i P^*'f- TV-'i -H^ip^- of F'P- B. bad, J?T 1- § 43. bank, HSfc' 1. (Up.) bark to, n53. Baal, bjjl 2. be to, n;ri, § 45. bear to, carry, Sfe'i ; (lift up). bear to, bring forth, *1T; § 39. be bom, Niph.; beget, Siph.; a boy i7) 2., girl m>. 2.; native land mVl», § 29. 2. bear a, 3^ 2. § 43. beast, iVjn (cattle), beauty, '^B;! 2. § 45 (fair), bed, HBD (stretch) ; a3B^a 1. (lie), befall to, NnjJ; n^jj. before, (face), beget to, (bear), begin to , 7?n Hiph. (hiVf) ; pass. Soph.; beginning nVnjjl. beguile to, M^^ jEtpA. behind, (after). behold, mn, ;n 2. § 43; 6eMrf J (me) "ijin ; behold we (us) UJH. See § 49. Very often followed by the participle. believe to , pK Siph. ; h of pers. belly lina 1.; IBS 2. i. (womb), beneath, instead of, nnR 2. ; plur. suff. ''finri &c., rarely sing, ex- cept DOnH. bereaved be, 72^ st. beside, ^S«, —me "i^SN, § 35. 2. between, )'3 2., § 41 ; between me and thee 1i''3^ "'i''? ; between me and you D3^3''31 — . beware to, Niph. of keep. beyond, "13J?. bind to, saddle, B'SII; nD«. bird, fowl, f)1J> 2. ; "lIBS, pi. DnsS. bitter, to be, ID s<., "ID^ § 42. bitter, IB 1., § 43. bless to, T13 Pi.; pass. Pm. § 36 ; blessed, ^^*13; blessing naiS 1. blind, ly; 3. blood, DT 1. ; |)?. blood shed; with heavy suff. D3OT. blot out to, destroy, flllO ; pass. Niph. boil to, cook, ^tS^a Pt. bone, nsj> 2. /■.; ^Z. im and oth. book, 1BD 2. bosom, p'ln 2., § 41. both, D^aii' (two); with Suff. both of us, tve both lyilS^ &c. bottle, non 2. bow a, nB*!? 2. f. bow down to, J>^3 ; trans. Hiph. boy, (bear). VOCABULAEY. 131 bread, Urh 2. broad be, DIIT st.; broad yfV) 1. ; breadth 2ni 2. break to, "ISC'; pass. Niph.; broken -|3B^i.' break down to, y®. break to (of day), rivj), day break -\ny 2. breath, nfiB'i 1. brightness, HJ^ 2. bring to, JTipA. of come. bring down to, BipA. of go down &c. bring out to, Hiph. of ^o out. bring up to, rear, ^"13 Pi.; (go up), brook, hnl 2. brother, flij. See Table of Irreg. Nouns, buck, he r;oat, t^^.n 2., § 41. build to, ni3, § 44. burn to, ^1^; pass. Niph.; with fire, tfKS. burnt offering n7lj?. bury to, l^iJ i pass. Niph. ; ;;rave 13(? 2. l, nnn;? b. place, but, ^3; DS"'?, d9n§ 21 Ex. butler, ni^B^O § 45; butlership sawte (drink), buy to, acquire, Hij?, (possess), buy com to, ^31!'. by, (of cause), ]I3, § 14. by (beside) ^2 § 49. calamity, T« 2., § 41. calf, ^ij;2.;/:n^ij;, §35. call to, cry, S'nj? ctof.; Ae called him Adam D'ltjl 1^ Sip ; ^e coWetJ Ais name Adam mS 1»tt'-n^ Nip; he was called Adam DIN 1^ Kipi. captain, lb* (prince), to capture (a city), 137. carcase (corpse), care tako to, Niph. of keep. cast to, throw, ']bl^ Siph.; pass. Hoph. cast lots to, (fall), cattle, nfins 1.; cons. s. 'n3; c. pi. 'lis. cavo, niJJO 1., S (o) firm, cease to, ^in, st; he ceased speak- ing 13lb> ^IH. cedar IIN 2. chamber, IIH 2 m. change to, ij^n Pi. cheek, '^rh 2., § 45. cherub, 3113. child, 1^: 2.; bblj? 1.; ^blj? 3.; cAiHrew o/' Israel !?«1to^. •'iS (son), choose to, in3; ace, 3. city, i>j;2./'.,'i)Z. anj;. clean be to, IHtS si. ; clean linO 1. cleave to, p31 st.; to 3. clothe oneself to, put on, wear, B'37 St., ace; clothe (another) with — , Siph., two accus. cloud, ]5J> 1. cold, adj. 1p 1. § 43 ; noun 1p 2. colt, TJ> 2. § 41. come to, come in, enter, go in, N13; bring Hiph.; pass. Soph.; entrance N13^ 1. comfort to, Dili Pi.; pass Pu. command to, TWi Pi.; pass. Pu.; a command TKifi 1 . T I * 9* 132 VOCABULAET. commit to, entrust (oversee), compassion, to have, Dm Pz., (pity)- conceal to, (hide). conceive mri; impf. JTirP; vav cons. TJRI. confide to, trust, ni33; in 3. contend to, 3^., § 40. continually, T'lpO. corn, |M 1. corpse, carcase, rt73i 1. corrupt to, nriB' Siph. (Pi) : pass. Niph. counsel to, advise, }*J?^, impf. yr^ deliberate Niph., Eithp.; counsel nSg 1., § 39. count to, number, 1BD ; HiB, § 44. count to, impute, reckon, it^lj. country the (field). court a, "ISn 1. c, pi. tm and oth. covenant a, JT'IB /".; to mafce a covenant — fllS (cut); establish, fulfil a — , — D''j5n (arise). cover to, nD3 Pi.; pass. Ptj.; a covering JIDSIp, § 45. cow, niS (ox). create to, N"]3 ; pass. Niph. creep to, \i>1i'), impf. in o; creep- ing things, ti'ft'1 2., coa cross to, pass over, by, *13JJ; Siph., bring over, make go through &c. ; a crossing, ford "13»» 1. cry to, (call). cry out to, pgS, pgl; a cry cultivate to, (serve), cunning, QIIJ^ 1. curse to, *11N ; ^^p P«. curse a, ban, D'ln 2. cut down to, cut, fllS ; pass. Niph. darkness, ^B'fl 2. dash in pieces, tt'tST Pi.; pass. Pu. daughter, 03 2. i.; my d. WS &c. plur. niiS 1 . Irreg. nouns, day, DV 2., § 41 ; pi. D'-DJ, iO\ dawn, day break, iriE' 2. death, HID § 41 (die), deceive to, (beguile), declare to, (tell) ; (hear) ; (count), deep be, p»^ St.; deep adj. pb^ 1. Add. Note 5 First Decl. deliberate to, (counsel), delight in to, ysn st; impf. yhlV, in pause Y^n\ delight, pleasure, ysh 2., § 35; delighting in, adj. |»Sn 1. deliver to, b'Si Eiph.; pass. Niph. depart to, I^D § 4C. descend to, T]; § 39. desert, wilderness, pasture,13no 1. desire to, lari; impf. "ibn^ (once ^fi^^) pass. Niph.; |*B0 st. desolation, n3*in 2. ' TIT despise to, ^^p; to be despised ^P(Qal). destroy to, nnB* Eiph. (Pi.) ; pass. Niph.; lati' Eiph t)ass. Eoph.; (blot out), die to, niD; to kill, Eiph., Pol.; pass. Eoph.; dead flD ^Ja^^-J death no 2., Q 41. disease, sickness, "i^H 2., § 45. displeased, tjgj 1. VOCABULARY. 133 divide to, !?13 Hiph,; pass. Niph. do to, (make). dog, 3^1 2. door, n^^ 2 f. dove, njl^ f. pi. 5m. draw near to, approach, S^jJ; 2fipA. bring near, offer, pre- sent; Vfii perf. used in Niph., Siph. bring near ; near ill]? 1 . dream to, D^ri; impf. tiblV; a dream Q17H, plur. oth. drink to, nntJ' ; to give to drink, water, tXpHf Siph.; feast nntS'D, § 4 5 ; a butler, cupbearer, njJB'l?, §45; cupbearer's office, same. drunk be, "UB^ si.; strong drink ■DB' 1. drive out to. It'll Ft., pass. iVip^. dry be, 12^2; sf., §39; 2^0; dry- land rvay 1. dumb, n^iN 3. dust, nsj? 1. dwell to, nB*; § 39; \y^ impf. in o; Siph., to place ; tabernacle ^IB*!?, pi. oth (im). eagle, IB'i 2. i. ear, ]Ji< 2. /"., du.; give ear, hearken, ]''t«n fi'ipfe., denom. ; (hear), earth, land, p« 2 /■. earthquake, B'X^ (shake), east, Q'ljJ; ow the east of — b mi?n. eat to, !?5?> § 35; give to eat, Siph.; meat, food, (^Di< 2.), n^D^ 2., b«0 1. edge, ns, M'jiA iAe edjje o/ the sword yV} ''$). See Table of Irreg. Nouns. eggs, n^Si? 2., pi. /■., § 41. Egypt, D^S!?/., §16. 1; Egyp- tian ■'ISO, fem. tV — . • I • ' elder, )j?J 1., (aged); elder, comp. = greater, (great), embrace to, p3n Pi. empty, Djjn. end, Y\> 2., § 43; latter end n''in« /: end, be ended, DFI st. § 42 ; Siph., to finish, complete; perfect, nri 1., D'^Dri i. enemy, ^1'A 3.; enmity naiJSI 2. enter to, «13. 3, ^K. entrance, N12fi 1. escape to, IS^fi iVipA.; rescue Pi. establish to, Siph. of Dip anse. eternity, (ever). evening, DIJJ 2 c. ever, eternity, D^IJ? 1 ., HJ? ; /or ever th))!b; eternal hills y nri; never yh . . . iib. every, te, every day D'i^"?^, (all) ; they went everi/ man to his house Wnb B^^K oVil. evil, adj. J?T 1., § 43; evil, w. Vl, nj;"j2., §43;n«2.,§41. except, DM "'3. extinguished be, '^JJ'n si. eye, Yy.2. f. § 41. dw; j)?. nii^^ fountains. face, faces, D'^iB 1. pi; before, formerly U^iSh ; before me ''iB? &c.; used both oitime ajiA place. 134 VOCABULARY, fair, beautiful, nSJl., §45; beauty, fairness "iBI 2. fall to, ^W, impf. iu o, § 33; let fall, drop, cast (lots), Hiph. famine, (hungry), far to be, p)1T St.; far, adj. pinn 1. fat Kna 1. , father, 2!^ irreg. See Table of Irreg. Nouns, fear to, «T st, § 39, impf. «y^.; inf. ntJT; pass. Niph.; terrible Nlli; 'fear n«T 2., NIIO 1., § 38 ; fear inS 2. feast, (drink), feast, to hold a (religious), IXH, § 42, a (religious) feast Sn 2., §43. feed to, njJT; shepherd TIJJ'l. field, m^ 1., § 45, pi. oth (im). fierceness, (heat), ]VV^. fight to, Wrh Niph.; with, against a ; for b ; battle, war nion^fi, nanVo, § 29. 2. fill to,' (be full). find to, SSD; pass. iVjpfe. fine, p^ 1., § 43. finish to, nVa PL ; pass. Pm. (be ended), fire, B^K 2. f, § 43. firmament, expanse, JJ^pT 1. first, former, {IB'KI; at first fish,'w, nw 1., § 18. 3. flame, TOTh 1. flee to, ma; Di|3; to put to flight, D'2.; to sprout grass (young) N''B''in Hiph. denom. grave, (bury). great be, grow, ^13 st; bring up (a child) Pi.; magnify, Hiph. (Pi.); — oneself, Hithp.; great hTti 1. ; greatness h^l 2. ; great 311., §43, pi. many. greyhairs n3''fc'. groan to, niK Niph. § 34. ground, HDIN 1. grow up, (be great). grow, of grass, (grass); (sprout). guilty be, DE'N st; suffer, be punished (as guilty) Niph., guilty, part.; guilt DB'N 1., n 1- H. Hades (She'ol). half, isn 2., § 45. halt to, be lame, JJ^S. hand, T 1. /■., § 18; pour— B3"|\ hang up to, Pp^ Hiph., J>''|?in. happen to, to, (befall), hard be, Tt^J>; harden, Hiph.; hard, severe riB^j? 1.; (heavy). hate to, »i'&, § 38; hatred n^ilif 2. head, m^, § 41. pi. D"'B'«1. heal, NBT; pass. JVipA. hear, hearken, obey, J^OB'; make be heard, declare, Hiph.; (ear) ; rumour, report J>Dt2^ 2. heart, 33^ 1., 3'? 2., §43 (pi. oth in both). 136 VOCABULAEY. heaven, heavens, D'^nti^ 1. pi. heavy be, 133 st.; make heavy, harden; (honour, glorify) Pi.; heavy, *1?3 1. Hebrew, ''13J?, fern. TV-r- &c. heifer, nblJJ 2. help to, llj?; help Itg 2., § 35. hero, mighty man, "1133. hide to, inO pass., reflex. Niph.; act. Eiph.; K3n pass., reflex. Niph., Sithp.; act. Bipft. high be, DH; lift up, Siph.; high, lofty D"3 1 . part. hill, mountain, 15 2., § 43. history, (genealogies), hither, here, adv. DITH. ho! Mn. holy be, B'li? s(.; sanctify Pi.; — oneself Sithp,; holy, saint ti^n]? 1.; holiness Vhp 2.; holy place, sanctuary Vhp, B''^i3!? 1 . honey, B*?^. horn, ni? 2". f. horse, Dffi 2.; mare, cavalry, f. host, army, time of service i<3S 1. pi. oth. hot be, an St.; hot DD 1., § 43; heat Dh 2. house, nil 2., § 41. ; home nri';3; pi. CM. how! HD; '^^N. howl to, ^^1 Hiph., § 39. hungry be, 3J?"1 St.; hungry, a^^T; hunger, famine ij)^ 1 . hunt to, 1i|3 ; venison *T;S. husband, (man). I. if, n«. ill, (evil). image, UTS 2. imagination, 1SJ 2. (form). impute to, reckon, 2^1J. in, prep. 3, § 14; into, 3, ^^^. increase to, nai. inhabit to, 32*^ § 39; inhabitant, 3B'\ inherit to, B'T § 39, dispossess Siph.; Vni, give to inherit, Siph. iniquity, ])» 2., § 41; (evil, guilt), innocent, ^pi 1., M^j?i. inside, midst, heart, 31(3 2. i.; within the city yyn 'j?3; — me •"aipa (midst), instead of, Dlf) (beneath). Israel VsitoV J. Jehovah, nin"'; perhaps njlT; usually read ''i'lN. Jerusalem, D^tS^IT. journey to, J?Dij journey J>DO 1. joyful be, rejoice &c., Vid^ st.; glad, joyful, part.; gladness, joy nriOb' 2., also, b"!! verb and noun, § 40 — 41. Judah, rn)n\ judge to, UBB^; to litigate, im- plead one another Niph.; a judge, jJari.; judgment B^B'B 1. just be, righteous &c. pTi st.; justify Siph.; — oneself, fltffcp.; just, righteous p^S; righte- ousness pna 2. »., npns i. VOCABULAEY. 137 K. keep to, watch, IDB'; keep one- self, take care, beware, Niph.; watchman, part.; watch lOB'D 1.; watch, charge, fl^BB'tJ, nnn— §29. key, nriBD 3 (open). kid, ^%'% 45. kill to, ain; mph. of die (n''i?n). kindle to, Eiph. of TO''; n|?;, §39. king be, rule TJ^D, over by, 3; make one king Siph.; pass. Soph.; a king "^70 2.; queen mbli 2.; kingdom nabott &c., § 29. 2. kiss to, p^i, impf. in a, (also o) ; daf.; a kiss ni?''B'J. kneel to, ^"]S si.; to make (a beast) kneel, Eiph. The other parts in sense of "bless"; (bless); knee 'SJ'IS 2. i., f. du. know to, J>n;, § 39; impf. j^n;;, imp. J?'n, inf. cons, rij?-!; pass. Niph.; inform, make known, Siph.; pass. Jloph.; knowledge, nj>T2. lad, "Ij;: 2. ; girl, damsel, f. nnS>i 2. ladder, 070. lady, mistress, tVVli 2. «. See § 29. 2. lance, nD*! 2. land, (earth), last, ]nn«, (after), law, instruction, MIW, (teach). leaf, nVjJ 1., §45. lean to, rest, press, act. ^fiD ; one- self, Niph.; ]'Jl^Niph.; uponh)), learn to, 1o7 st; make learn, teach. Pi., two ace. leave to, abandon, 31JJ ; pass. Niph. leave off to, stop, (cease). left (over) be, remain, 1NB'; to leave over, let remain, Siph.; pass. Niph. left (hand), '?1«'»fc>. length, (long). leopard, IDi 1. lest, conj. "|B, joined with impf, lick to, pj57. lie down to, lie, MB* s*.; a bed aSB'p 1.; to lie down (of beasts) ^51 **•/ 8' stall, rest- ing place }»31D 3., § 30. lie to (speak falsely), 3JD Pi.; a lie 3J3 1. life, (live). lift up to, bear, »\S) (high). light be, shine, "lIN, perf. in o; give light, Siph., § 40; light •11« 2.; luminary, light llStt 1., pi. oth (tm). light be, swift, ^J? si., § 42; to curse, Pi.; lighten, Siph.; light, swift ■?(? 1., § 43. like, prep. 3. § 14. lion, "'IN 2., § 45; young lion lip, edge, shore, T&)S 1. du. listen to (hear), 7X, 3. little be, )b(3 st, § 22; little IBJ; 1., 1D(? 1. — the first form is not inflected (once in cons.), 138 VOCABUIiAEY. the second is inflected naajj &c. See Add. Notes. little a, some, a few Hyo ; a little water, food &a. 73i<, D'O '13; a few people 'Q ''JIB &c. live to, njlj, § 45; living ''n (from root doub. 'Ay.) ; life ''H chiefly pi. D^^Di living crea- ture, beast njn. lofty be nna St.] lofty, high PliJ 1 ; loftiness, height 'Kl\ 2. long be, '^I'liJ si.; to prolong Siph.; long ^'o*^- only in cons. ^"IS (see Add. Notes to first decL), '^'1« 1. infl. n3"lK (see Add. Notes); length ^nt< 2. look to, t33i ffipft. lord, ]n^ 1.; takes pi. suff., ex- cept in 1st pars. s. where it admits sing, also (and rarely in 1 p. pi.); Lord TDTW lot, !?nia 1., pi. oth. loud, ^nj (great). love to, arjK St., § 34; love nsns inf. cons. low 'be, ^BB^ St.; low ^BB*; to ' " T ' TV' bring low JEip^. of 7^Vf or J?^D. M. maid, nriBB^ 2.; niJK 1., pi. ir- reg. ninON , see Table of Irr. Nouns. magnify to, (be great). make to, do, ilb'JJ; pass. Niph.; to make one thing into another, two accus,; work, deed Hte'VO, § 45; ^S>§ poet.; a work hi^ 2. male, 13t 1. man, husband, B^'N; man, man- kind Dn«. manner, "^"^ 2., BBB'l? 1. mantle, ^^J?a; nr\», § 29. 2. many be, increase, n3T ; increase to, act. Hiph.; many ST 1., §43. mare, (horse). matter, (word). measure to, TIO, § 42. meat, (eat). meet to, Nlj?; infin. cons. nN"!|?, 0 2. i. § 29. 0. oath, n3;«B^ (swear), offer to, Siph. of 3"lp (irate near. offering, 13^j? ; meat — (i. e. blood- less) nni»; drink — '^95 2 i.; burni>-n'3S;. ointment, ^ISB* 2. old, (elder, aged). olive, nii 2., § 41. on, upon, 3, ^J?. §§ 14. 49. one, § 48; one — another, § 45 (friend), (brother), only, pn, •qN. open to, nriS; pass. Niph.; door nns 2. i.; key r\F\S1i 3.; to open (of eyes) nj?B ; pass. Niph. oppress to, I'll?, rUJ? Pi. or, IN; DN, DKI in interrogative or indirectly interr. sentences. — shall we go or shall we for- bear? h-V}i D« (n«i)— Tjban; or no, or not iih QN. other, "iriK, pi. ni"!n«. out, out of, ]ip. out at, in at, nj?3 (properly "in- terval" "distance"). outside, YTi ; to the outside flS^Hn ; on, at, the outside of the house over, upon, by,. overflow to, overwhelm, fjDtS'. oversee to, visit, IpS; commit, entrust, Siph.; an overseer TpB 1. ox, IB 2., § 43; cow, fern.; "WVf §41. pain, "hn 2., §45; at?3a. palace, 73fl 1. pi. tm (dth). palm, (hand), f)3 2., § 43. pass by, ^^J? (cross). passover, riDB 2. pasture, "1310 (desert). path, 3''na 1. pay to, th^ Pi. people, Dj; 2., § 43. perfect, DR 1., § 43; D'^an 1. (be ended), perish to, 13^1, § 35; destroy. Pi., Siph. permit to, ]rii ace. pit, prison, 113 2., § 41, pi. oth. pity to, 150, § 42. place to, Ci?', T\'<\^; (set), (dwell), (rest), place a, Dlptt 1., pi. oth; (arise). 140 VOCABULAET. plague, Vii 2.; HSB. plain, n^gk plant to, VPJ; a plant y^i 2 i. play to, sing &c., ICt Pi. plead with to, 3^, 3, DJ?, § 40. plough to, B'ln. plunder to, tJ3, (spoil) ; (take). poor, ]n{}, ^'^ 1., § 43. possess to, njj?, E'T; possessor nij7; possession nijJO, § 45. pot, "yo, pi. oife. pour out, 'jJBB^ (spill), powerful, n!|3J| 1. prayer, n^Sri. precept, nijSB, (oversee), prey, D1p^9 (take), presence, in of, ''iB? (face), priest, )nl3 3. prince, "p 2., § 43. prolong to, Siph. of '^lij be hng. promise to, 1D^ ; infin. prophesy to, 'K33 Niph., (Sithp.) ; cowcerMiMy, 7, 7j>; prophet prove to (try), I^S. |n3. proverb, tK'O 1. punished be , Qal, Niph. of DB*;!? 6e guilty. pursue to, f^. put on, wear, tS'37 occ; to clothe, dress with, niph., two ace, § 38. put out to, (the hand), Th0. put to, place, set, jfll Q. queen nsVo 2. quiet, IJKB'. quiet become, pJlB', impf. o. rain to, ^BD SipA.; rain IBB 1. ram, h''» 2. ' ransom, IBlS 2., (atone). read to, Nlj?. rebel, revolt to, JJB'f; against 3. receive to, n|?b. § 33. redeem to, iTlB, ^NJ; redemption rnS; redeemer ^NL refrain to, pHT st. (far). refresh to, 1J?D. refuge, (flee), (trust). regard to, 7\V^, h», (look). reign to, (king). rejoice to, (joyful be). remember to, TSt ; pass. Niph.; call to remembrance, mention, Siph.; memory 131 2. remove to, "1!|D intrans.; EJiph. trans. rend to, J^ljJ. repent to, DHi Niph. DHX report, n^^B^ (hear). rescue to, (escape) ; (deliver). rest to, nSE^; make cease, Hiph.; n»; give rest, Hiph. n^jn M.; place, set, ffipA. n''3n; resting- place IliaB, nO»0, § 41; sabbath flSK^ 1. restore to, (return). return to, 31B'; restore Hiph., Pol.; return HS^B'^. reveal to, nbs. review to, IjSB, (oversee). rib, side, J>b' /"• l-l pl- 3*A («•»)• riches, ^';n 2 (force); rich TB'JJ. ride to, 33^ sj.; to make ride, VOCABULARY. 141 set on a horse &c. , Eiph.; chariot Ml 2. i., nMIB. riddle, HTH. righteous be, (just), rise to. Dip. rise early to, Siph, 03^*. rise to (of star &c.), mj; rising, shining ITIt 2. river, "IHi 1. pi. oth and tm; li^'' (mainly of J^ife and its branches), roll to, hbi Qal, Eiph.; pass. Niph. rule over to, (govern), rumour, (report), run to, ^!l"l; make run, bring hastily, Eiph.; runner, post. sabbath, (rest). sacrifice to, nDJ; sacrifice nSJ 2. i.; altar CI?!? 3., pi. oth (offer, offering), saddle to, (bind), saint, (holy), sake of, for, "3 "lU^?, — of me nova; 4'???; see 13;?, hbi in Lex. salt, n'jO 2. salvation, (save). sanctify to, (holy). sanctuary, (holy). sand, bin 2., § 41. satisfied be, ^3^ si., mife, ace; to satisfy with, Eiph., two ace, § 38; satisfied, ^3^? 1.; fulness y3b> 2, j;3V'i. save to, y\^-> Eiph., Tt^^n ; pass. Niph.; salvation, safety li^l say to, promise, IfiK, § 35. scattered be, |>i|£3 (impf.); to scatter, Eiph.; pass. Niph. sceptre, tribe, rod, aSE* 2. scribe, "ISb 3. (count), sea, D; 2., § 43, cons. D;, "D^^, and U1 (only in tjWD^). see to, ntjl, § 44 — 45; pass. Niph.; shew, let see, Eiph., two ace; seer, nN*!; sight, aspect, face HKID. seed, y^l 2., (sow), seek to, enquire at, tS'l'^; pass. Niph. seek to, t5'p3 Pj. sell to, "130; pass. Niph. send to, ri7B'; send away, loose, Pi.; a missile n'?t5' 2. i. serpent, tj^ni 1. serve to, till, 13^; pass. iVipft.; enslave, Eiph.; servant 13^ 2. ; service iTliS?; to serve = min- ister (mainly in sacred things) mti' Pi. set to, ]ni, difc>, niB*; jOffip/)., P67./ pass. Niph., (place), seven, seventh, § 48. shadow, 'tis 2., § 43. shake to, ti'KT; trans. Eiph.; an earthquake B^^T 2. shave to, vhi Pi.; Eithp. shed to, (spill). Sheol, hades, ViNB'. shepherd, herdsman, n^h (feed), shine to, "11K= 142 VOCABULARY. shore, (lip), short, is;? 1. shoulder, DSB' 2. i. shut to, 13? i pass. 'Si'ph. sick be to, Xhx\ ; sickness ''^n. side, end, ."IST (n3T,?), du. (once sing.) \ in eons, kaph has silent be, Dl si. (imp/, also in o). silver, *)D3 2. simple one a, "iflS 2., § 45. sin to, «Bn; sin «Bn 2., nSBH; sinner (sing.) NQh ^a»^., NBn (used in plur.). sing to, T'B'; a song TB' and /em. sister, flinij 1. Irreg. nouns, sit to, dwell, 1^\, § 39; make to sit, place, Hiph; pass. Soph.; a seat 30^123 1. slay to, J'ln (die), slaughter to, tsnEf. sleep to, ]B'j si.; sleep, slumber DU; sleep heavily DTI Niph.; sleep njB' 1., nOliR; heavy (ecstatic) sleep nO'l'iri, e firm, smell to, nn Siph.; smell n^T 2. smite to, *)3}; pass. Niph.; TOi Siph. nan, pass. Soph.; V33; stroke, defeat flBJO, HSD, V35 2. i. (The word n3n' is of general use, the other two very commonly of divine plagues.) smoke \^)l 1. snare, HB 2., § 43. sole (of foot), palm, *)5 2 /".. §43. some, (a little) ; ]Q partitive. son, ]3 3. Irreg. nouns. sore, y\ (bad). sorrow, heaviness, ]M) 1. soul, VfSi 2. f. south, 3Ji 2. sow to, yij; bear seed, Siph.; seed j;nj 2. speak to, 131 Pi. (perf. in e) ; a word, thing 131 1 . ; everything 131 -to, MOiHn^i '1 ^3 — Hb, or '1— K'^. spill to, ^SB?; pass. JKpA. spirit, wind, nil /. 2. spoil to, plunder, TW; spoil ^bB* 1. T r spread to, spread out (hands), 1913; )n''Siph., § 39. 3. sprout to, ni?3; make to sprout, Siph.; sprout, branch TOS 2. i.; (grass), staff, ^jSO 3., pi. oiA. stall, lair, }'3"10 3., (lie down), stand to, IDJJ; set up, Siph.; 09. steal to, 33J Qal and Pi.; pass. Pm., Niph.; thief, 333, o. star, 3313 1. still, yet, more, llj?; suff. as ]it{, see § 49; stUl alive ^D nj>; (again), statute (command); ph 2., § 43, fem. ni?!^; (precept), stone, ]3N 2. stranger, sojourner, 13 1., § 41; strange, foreign '»133 (nokhrt). street, y^n 2.; pi. oth; pV!f 2.; 3hl, f. pi. oih. VOCABULAKY. 143 strength, (strong). Btretch to, flBi, also Siph.; (put out); a bed riteD. strip to, BB'S Hiph. strong be, pjn st; }»BIJ st.; streng- then PL; DSJ? St.; strong pjn, tj;, niSJJ; strength, pjh and fern.; \)i 2., § 43; HS 2., §43. strive to, plead, y^, § 40, strife, plea nn. 2., nan.D. suck to, py § 39; suckle, give suck, Biip^./nurse, par^. Siph., see § 29. suffer to, punishment, (be guil- tyl; to suffer pain DK3 sf. (pain), sun, B^Dti' 2. swarm to, Yll^; with ace; a swarm yy^ 2. swear to, V3.\lfmph.; oath nj|!Qtt^. sweat, nj?l e firm, sweet be, pflB sf.; sweet plflS 1-, inflect, nijinn. sword, 2nn 2., f. sycamores, D'^DpB'. T. tabernacle, ]3B'l? (dwell). take to, np^; pass. Niph., Pu., § 33; prey, plunder nip^B; take (capture in war &c.) 13^ ; pass. Niph. tall, niJ (great). Cons. H3a. tambourine, ^jh 2., § 43. taste to, DJ2^; taste, sense DXB 2. teach to, (learn), m" Siph., nniH; law, instruction H^in. tell to, ni3 Siph.; pass. Soph.; (count), (say), (speak), temple, hytj (palace), tent, hrjH 2; pi. tJi^riK. terrible, Xlli (fear), testify to, TiJ? Siph.; witness *1J>. that, conj. "i^S; in order that]J?tt7 with infin. cons., or imperf.; that is very often expressed by vav conseeut. then , of time , JS ; then of tran- sition in thought, 1 simple and conseeut. thence, (there), there, DB'; thither ilOK'; thence Dte'D; where, whence &c. (who), there is (was), ^l; — water Vi), n\Q; I have "h B'' &c.; there is (was) not, ]\t$, there is no water — Y^ ; suff., see § 49. therefore, ]3"Vj?' thief (steal), thigh, '^T 1.; cons. '^^\ See Add. Notes to first declens. thing, (speak), thither, (there), thorn, y^p 2. thought, nna'nD, § 29. 2 (count), cons. pi. 'niS. thresh B^H; threshing-floor Yii 2., pi. oth. threshold, i)D 2. i., § 43 Eem. throne, seat, «D3 3., pi. ott. thus, nb. tidings, to bring, preach '\]tf2 Pi. 144 VOCABtTLABY. till, cultivate, (serve). till, until, prep. Ig; conj. IJ? IB'K with perf. or impf. ac- cording to sense. Swff. § 49. time, ng 2., § 43; time {fois, mal) DJ?S 2. gen. /em., plur. %m, (prop. s 1.; wood, pi. and tremble to, tJT si. tribe, (sceptre). trust to, to flee for refuge to, noil, 3; a place of refuge none; (confide), (flee). to try (as silver), *)"1S, ]n3; to try, prove, tempt HDl Pi. turn to, overturn, turn into, ^Bil; pass. Niph.; (return), turn aside to, IID. twins, D'«Di— Hiph. Tiasn to destroy. naX to be willing (K"e § 35).— Impf. ^^^s^ ]1''3l!j m. poor. ]aN 2 f., a stone. p2« Qal unus.— Niph. pn«a to wrestle, Ex. 37. DIS 1 W., TOOM. HD'IK 1 /"., fAe ground. jnx 1 »*., fori.— Takes sufif. of plur. noun. See Note 4, Ex. 40. With prefix li'isb &c. nil« 2 /:, a mantle, § 29. 2. anS *o love (Pe. Gutt.). — Impf. anN^ (and other forms), ^nh 2 OT., a ) Perf. •n«. Hiph. Ii^n 31K /bwr, § 48. tIK 2 m., cedar. ""IK 2 m,, a Kow, § 45. ^"IK 2 w., length. |>lt< 2 /"., eariA, ?aMi; pi. oth. I^N fo cwrse (^Ayin Doub.). — Impf. -^K § 42. tJ'N 2 /■., fire, § 43. "ItJ^K rel. pron. who, which, § 13. •TIB'S f., Asherah, (the goddess or her symbol), flS a particle placed before the definite ace. Suff. § 49. nS prep. with. Suff. § 49. nRS pron. thou, § 12. ]lnX \ f., a she-ass. 3 prep. f«, o», among; by of instrument. § 14. Suff. § 49. "IN3 2 /•., a toe?;; pi. oth. 133 2 J. m., a garment, covering. — Suff. ni3. Note p. 17. 13 2 m. {separation), IS? apart, alone; I alone '13^ liN § 43. 713 Qal unus. — Hiph. to separate, divide. — Niph. pass. nons 1 f., cattle, tame beasts ; cons. nan3, cons. pi. nian3. «13 to come, go, go in (Vy, K"^).— Impf. N13\— Hiph. N^3n, to Jrjnj'. Hoph. pass. § 38, 40. "113 2 m., a ^if ; pi. otA, § 41. B'13 to 6e ashamed (Vy § 40).— Impf. t!'13\ Its to plunder, spoil (Doub. 'Ayin § 42).— Imp. ti;. ins to choose (kyin Cfwtt. § 36); ace, 3. PIBS to 3also'?...p Ex.27. fl^3 2 m., a house. See Irr. Nouns. n^i3, birthright. VOCABULARY. 149 15 3 m,, a son. See Irr. Nouns. niS to huild, apoc. impf. ]3^1. r? 2 /"., a daughter. See Irr. Kouns. nj?3 2 prep. JeAini, in at, out at, jl vnn 'i «■» ai, oitf o< the window ; ncinn 'i over the wall. — Suff. i"li?l § 36. 2. 7J>2l to marry, (Ay. Gutt.); part. pass. f. TiTS'S, married. b)l% 2 m., /o»-i, husband, Baal. Suff. § 36. 2. Ijji 2 »»., morning. afpa Qal unus. Pi. B^j?? i to roll (Douh. 'Jly.).— Impf. ^i\— Hiph. ^an to roll. Niph. ?ia to 6e rolled. Da adv. a^so; Da ... Da both . . . am2. 7fia to weaw. Niph. ^ass. )a 2 c, garden, § 43. Saa to stoa?. — Pi. id, Pu. ^ass. la 1 w., a stranger, § 41. tS*"]} toiriwe OM* (ky. Gutt. § 36); oftener Pi. — Niph. pass. i"! 2 c, a bear, § 43. p5'n to cfewe (st. § 22); to 2. ^3^ Qal unus. except Act. part. 13^ speaking. — Pi. "13^ to speai. — Pu. pass. 13^ 1 m., a word, thing. ti'3'1 honey. a^ 1 m., a^sA; f. HJ'^. Ill 2 »«., generation; pi. ?m and o«A, § 41. rh^ 2 /"., a door (door-leaf) ; du. 150 VOCABULARY. D'n 1 m,, blood; your Mood D3OT. — D'^B'l blood spilt. § 18. 3. DDT to be silent {Doub. 'Ay.). Impf. Ch\ § 42. na^ see y'[\ '^'ifh 2 c, a way. «E^^ 2 »»., (young) grass. StS*! Qal unus. — ^Hiph. to produce grass (denom.). n (^D) Art., tA«. § 11. tj particle of interrogation. § 49. "inn 1 m., honour, majesty. K!|npron. § 12. lin m., glory, splendour. njrj to be (JV'b and Lam. Gutt. § 45. 2).— Impf. n^n), apoc. \iv— Inf. Cons. nw'nVnS &c. ^S""!! 1 TO., palace, temple. ni3n. Seenaa. Dl7n adv. hither, Ijbn to ^0. — Impf. ^^\ — Hiph. •^^^in (See § 39. Eem. 6.).— Hithp. ^?nnn nt to sow (§ 37).— Hiph. ri!<7 to ^'e^ see(7. y^l 2 TO., seed; cons. reg. and J>1t. «3n Qal unus.— ffiph. K'^ann to hide. — Niph. K3I|Ii to hide one- self; Hithp. id. VfyiJ to bind, bind up, saddle, (§ 34). VOCABULAEY. 151 350 to keep a feast (§ 42 V"V)-— Impf. if]\ 30 2 m., a feast (hajj) § 43. ^"in to cease, kave off (st. § 22). t!hn 1 adj. new. l!'']h 2 m., new moon, month, § 35. ^in 2 m., sand. § 41. ilttin /"., a wall. yVi 2 w., outside, street, field; pi. 6e (iT'!? § 45. 2). in to live (V"V § 42). in 1 adj. living, f. n% § 43. in 2 w., life; cons, in; mostly used in pi. D^^D W/e. n^n /"., a Kotm^ creature, beast. h\h 2 »»., /brce, valour, power. § 41. 9''n 2 m., bosom. § 41. DSn 1 adj., wise. § 35. nosn 2 /"., w)isio»i. § 29. i^n 2 »»., disease, sickness. § 45. b>\'n— Hiph. !?nn B)1 to desire, wish (st. § 22, § 34).— Impf. ^bi:|i, ^Bn\ ^Sn 1 adj., desiring, § 35. Add. Note 4 to First Decl. yn 2 »»., arrow. § 43. "ISn 1 c, enclosure, court, village; pi. ?m, 3(A. § 35. ph 2 »!., statute. § 43. S'lII to dry up, be waste (st. § 22). iin 2 /■., sword. n'llj to be hot, angry. — Imp. apoc. ID!!- ns^n If., a reproach. 3B^I1 to think, reckon (§ 34).— Lnpf. 2l5'ip\ ■sja^n 2 m., darkness. t3 ino to be clean (st. § 22, § 36).— Pi. ina to cleanse. ^ino 1 adj., c?ea«. 31C3 to Je ^oo(? (17 § 40).— Perf. 21tS. Other parts from 3t3V — Impf. aBi\— Hiph. Vl?'''!}. §39. 210 1 adj., good. § 41. 21t3 2 m., the good, best. § 41. DJ;B to tosto (§ 36). D5J& 2 Ml., tesfe, sense. § 36. 2, ^l<1 m., stream (asp. Nile). B'ai to 6e ^ry (st. § 22, § 39). 152 VOCABDLAKT. Ti 1 /"., hand. Your hand OST : pi. nnj hands fig. (handles). yv to know (V'B § 39).— Impf. J?T.— Inf. Cons. njJT — Niph. ynii pasa. — Hiph. to make known. mn^ Jelwvah, the Lord. The vowels are those of '•i'lK lord. Scholars are mainly agreed on the pointing nin\ With prefix r\\7\>h (i. e. ''i'lW^). mm'' Judah. T I ni'' 2 »»., a dfljr. Table of Irr. Nouns, nil^ f., a dove ; pi. tm. 3t3^ see 310. T;^ 2 »»., MtMe. § 41. ta'' to he able (§ 39).— Impf. *lb; ai3. nSJj! 1 /"., counsel. nsj 1 adj., /air. § 45. NS; to go out (V'S § 39).— Impf, «?:; inf. cons. n«S (for MKS). — Hiph. to bring out. SSia 1 m., an outgoing. § 39. 38. 33'' Hiph. Jisri to set, place. (§ 39. 3). J?3'' Hiph. X'Sn to spread (§ 39. 3). -is; to form (§ 39). "is; 2 m., form, imagination. np; to 6Mr».— Impf. ip''''^ np;- Hoph. poss. yp"* Qal unus. except Impf. Yp'''[ to awake (§ 39).— Perf. &c. in Hiph. y^r\. Ki; to /eor (§ 39).— Impf. SI''':. Inf. Cons. nW"!;.- Niph. Nni3; part. id. terrible. Followed by ]P, ySIS, and "JS. N"]) 1 a.dj. fearing. "TV to go down (§ 39). — ^Impf. nT &c.— Hiph. nn.in to bring down. — Hoph. pass. p7U'lT Jerusalem. n*;; l m., (§ 39).— Impf. jB^i;. VOCABULARY. 153 y^" Qal unus.— Hiph. )t^n to save, — ^Niph. pass, y^l 2 m., salvation. njJiltJ'^, f., id. njJilB^n f., id. *1B^J 1 adj., upright, righteous. ^n^ 2 i., remnant, rest. 3 prep, as, like. Suff. § 49. "Witli rel. 1^X3 as, !cfte«. When he kept nCiB? nB^«3, or liaB'S (inf. Cdns. § 31)'. 153 to be heavy, severe (st. § 22). — Pi. to make heavy, harden, honour. — Nipb. he honoured. ^^^ l adj., heavy, severe, laden, (See Add. Note 3 First Decl.). *1133 1 m., honour, glory. Tt2 adv. thus. pb 3 m., a priest. § 36. 3313 1 m., a star. ^13 Qal unus. — Hiph. ^'"Sil to set, establish. — Po'lel ]M3 id. — Mph., Po'lal, pass. ''S conj., that, for, because; of time when, whenever. DK "0 except, iibh 2 i. m., a prison. § 38. 3^3 2 m., a dog. n^3 to be ended (§ 44).— Pi. to complete, finish. — Pu. pass. Vi 2 m., all. § 43. 13TV3 every- thing; IS'H'Vs . . . N7 nothing. ]3 adv., so, thus. ]3'72 therefore. nD3 to cover (§ 44), Qal unus. except partt. — ^Pi. HDS to cover. — Pu. pass. nD3B 1 m., a covering. § 45, f|D5 2 m., sitoer, money. *)? 2 Z'., paZm of hand, sole; du. § 43. PI. oth, "lg3 •. § 29. 2. T? usually HT? with He of ace, 2 w., night. PI. Hl'j^V § 41. 154 TOCABULAKY. *I37 to take, capture. — Niph. pass, "xdl to learn (st. § 22).— Pi. nsb" to teach. ilB^' adv., why? (), HIO). ]5>&7 conj., prep., in order thai, to; for the sake of, with infin. and impf. (flij?). XXph to take (§ 33. 4).— Impf. n^l.— Inf. Cons, nnj?.— Niph. ni273 pass. — Pu. id. — Hoph. nj3J id., in impf. Cip?!? m., plunder. Q^,nj37lS m. (2u., tongs. pi?^ to Zici (§ 42). Impf. pV.— Pi. i(J. D ii«a adv., wry; also ni«aa, 'a nj;. n^O 1 /:, hundred; du. D^nNO. '§48. no WO anything (prop, a feck). 1lk». SeellN. te«». See ^3«. T 1 - - » 7^3Q m., i^e ;?oocZ. ■D"!)? 1 »»., pasture, desert. inO fo weasMj-e (§ 42). — Impf. lb\ — Niph. pass. 7X0 pron. what? what, § 13. inteij. how! how? J1» to melt (§ 40).— Niph. pass. rrh^Q. Seeih). KSia. See NSV ma W to plant (§ 33, 37).— Impf. W. HDi Qal unus. (§ 33, 44).— Hiph. T\'Si\, to smite; impf. apoc. 1J\ — Hoph. pass. nSD f., a stroke. *1Bi 1 m., a leopard. ■SJDi to pour out, found; set, esta- blish. ■^W 2 i. m., a drink offering. yy. See yjii. njji 2 w., a lad, § 36 ; /■. iTIW o %i to fall (§ 33). Impf. te\— Hiph. TBil , n«b'.— Niph. pass. 105 Note p. 9, 112. IB;; 1 TO., dMsi. § 35. yV. 1 «•, <»-ee. § 18. 3. nsj;. See ^j;;- D33; to Secome strong, numerous. DWJ? 1 adj., strong. DSj; 2 /"., a Jone. PI. ?m, oiA. SIJJ 2 m., ewewiw^. pB'JI to oppress, injure (§ 34). nb'j; to (?o, «.wi, wafte (§ 34, 44). — Impf. apoc. l!>J?\ — Niph. ntos?: ijoss., but fern, nn^^vj- li^Vli m., a work. § 45. nj; 2 c, time. PI. ?m, Sift. § 43. nnjj adv. «0M/. HB m., jwoMiA. Irreg. Nouns. "iB"Vj> according to, Ex. 39. 2111 ^Sb tcibs, 'ybs. Add. Note 3 First Decl. naS to sprout (§ 37).— Hiph. to make sprout. naS 2 i. m., a sprout, branch. pJJS fo cry OMi. § 36. ]S3 to hide, lay up. )1B3 1 m., the north. g"nnS3 3 m. (in pi.), a frog. "IS 1 adj., adversary. § 43. 2?p fo curse (§ 42). ^5iJ *o collect, gather. — Pi. id. ISjJ to bury. — Niph. pass. *1Dj5 2 i. m., a grave. B^nj? to be holy, sacred (st. § 22). — Pi. to hallow, sanctify. — Hiph. id. — Niph., Hithp. re- flexive. B'nj? 1 adj., holy. Vhp 2 m., holiness, sanctuary. ^[>0 1 m., sanctuary. 7lp 2 m., voice, sound. § 41. Dip to arise, stand (§ 40 Parad.). — Hiph. to set up, establish. Dp 1 part., standing. § 41. Dlpa 1 c, a place. PI. oth. Y^'p 2 m., thorns. § 41. VOCABULARY. 159 TtSj? to be little (st. § 22 Parad.). ^bJJ 1 adj., little (not inflected but very common). ^Bj; 1 adj., little, f. naoj? (in- flected form). Add. Note 5 First Decl. 77 j3 to be light, despised (§42, Parad.). — Pi. to make light of, to curse. — Hiph. to lighten of. h'p_ 1 adj., light, swift. § 43. niiJ to acquire, buy, possess. § 44. riiJJB m., possession, property, cattle. § 45. y^ 2 m., end. § 43. *)Sj5 to be angry. *1S(? 1 adj., short. i^^i? to call, cry, read. — Pu. pass. Y.t> 1' SIJ? he called him Cain; ^b t<"liJ3 he was called. See § 43, p. 109. S^jJO 1 m., an assembly. § 38. «"];? and n^iJ to befall, ace. Ex. 38. Inf. Cons. f. niSl'lj?, vrith prep. inNIp'? to meet me ; tf^Xn riNIp"? • Tit • ' • T -It ■ to meet, against, the man. yy^ to draw near, come near (st. § 22). — Hiph. to bring near, to offer. 3nj3 1 adj., near, neighbour, re- lative. y)P^ 2 i. m., inside, heart. ''S'lpSl loithin me ; T'Jjn 3"lp3 within, in the midst of, the city. l"l| 2 f., horn. yiiJ to tear, rend (§ 37). na'^ 2 /■., a bow. n«n «o see (§ 44).— Impf. HNT, apoc. NT., «nn &c., but N")'! 3 m., 3 /". Nini.— Niph. jjass., to appear. — Hiph. to shew, two ace. niJID m., a sight, appearance, face. '§45. Vi^^ 2 m., head; pi. D'^B'K'n. § 41. )1B'N"1 adj., /frsi, former. 'Zyy to be many (§ 42), used only in Perf. and Inf. Cons. ST 1 adj., great, much; pi. many. §43. ni"1 fo wcrease, multiply (§ 44); impf. apoc. ST^. and 2T\ — Hiph. to multiply, cause to in- crease. — Inf. abs. ns^n ; ri3Tn adv. much. TT[ adj., /bM»-«^. § 48. |*DT 5"l» § 30. Eem. bT\ to slander. 7^1 2 f., a foot. du. ^"IT to pursue. — Pi. id. nil 2 c, breath, wind, spirit. PI. DIT to be high, to rise up (§ 40). —Hiph. to lift up. Ex. 40.— Hoph. pass. D"] 1 adj., high, lofty. § 41. Dllfi 1 »»., height, high place. |*n to nm (§ 40). Dni to 6e broad, wide (st. § 22). 160 VOCABULARY. anS 2 m., breadth. 3h*1 2 f., hroadway, street. PI. oth. nnT to love (§ 36).— Pi. Dni. n"3 io wasfe (§ 36). pilT T to /eed, ferad (§ 44).— Part. njj'l a s^epftercZ. njj"] m., a friend; inj?"! . . . B'''I5! one . . . another. yy^ to be evU (§ 42, st. Eem. a). — Hiph. J?in to afflict, injure. J>T 1 adj., evil; f. TVjIT) an evil. B^J?! to quake (§ 36).— Hiph. to sAa^e. li'j?! 2 w., earthquake. XSI to AeaZ (§ 38).— Niph. pass. nSST 2 f., a coal, liot stone, 3|?n to rot (st. § 22). JJ^P'^ 1 m., firmament. J^B'^ 1 adj., wicked. vi ^NB' to asft (§ 36) ; ^ i» reference to. hW^ c, Sheol, Hades. 'WX^ to be left, over, to remain (Qal rare). — Hiph. to leave over. — Niph. pass. taaa' 2 m., rod, sceptre, tribe. V2^ 2 seven; ig^E^ seventh. §48. y'2Xi Qal unus. — ^Niph. to swear (§ 37). "13^ to break. — Niph. pass. — ^Pi. to break in pieces. — Part. Niph. latfi broken. 13B' 2 i., and "OB' 2 m., breach. la^f' to buy or seK cor«. "UB^ 2 w., ^raire, corre. rjB' to rest, cease. — Hiph. to naB* 1 c, resf, sabbath. '"9^ m., almighty, generally with ^N God. i^B* to turn, return (§ 40). — Hiph. to restore, bring back. IBIB* 1 c, a tntmpet. PI. 6th. p),\if 2 m., street. PI. D-'plB'. § 41. niB' 2 m., oa;. PI. D"'-\1B' § 41. 13I1B' to stoy, slaughter (§36, Parad.). inB' 2 m., dawn. nn\tf Qal unus.— Pi. nnE* to destroy (§ 36). — Hiph. id.; to act corruptly, to corrupt. — Niph. pass. TB* 2 m., a song; f. id. § 41. n-'B' to set, place (§ 40). 33B^ to ;te £ioM)» (st. § 22). VOCABULARY. 161 nSK^ to forget (§ 37).— Niph. pass. tea^ to be bereaved (of children) (St. § 22). pB' to dwell.— Impi. pS\—Sxp'h. to cause to dwell, place. ISB'D 1 m., dweliing, tabernacle. "DB^ to be drunken, (st. § 22). XVtl} to send, stretch out. — Pi. send away. ]Tf>^ \ c.,a table. '\}V} Qal unus. — Hiph. to cast, cast o;^.— Hoph. pass. d'pE' to be whole, sound (st. § 22). — Pi. to complete, perform, pay. th^ 1 adj., whole, sound. WU^ 1 m., soundness, health, peace. 1^^ 1 adj., three. § 48. Dtf adv., there; nSB' thither; DtS'a from there, thence, n^ 3 m., a name. PI. niBB'. § 30. 2. naB> Qal unus. — Hiph. to destroy. — Niph. pass. W'ii^ 1 pi., heaven, heavens. DDB^ to be desolate (§42). Impf. nii*;, ntS'': and DB'V— Hiph. to desolate. — Niph. pass. yaB^ to hear, listen to, 2, h, ^« (§ 22).— Niph. ^ass. JJfiB' 2 TO., a report. lOB' to fceef), watch. — Niph. to take heed, beware. — Hithp. to keep oneself. ^IZlif 3 part., watchman. "IBB^O 1 TO., and iTIDti'D, mDE^B /"., wari, watch, observance. § 29. 2. niB^ 1 /■., a year. Pi. D^iB^ (Poet. o to Aato (§ 38. st.). 11 162 VOCABULARY. Tlt'fS 1 f., lip, edge, bank; du. t]'iO to burn. — ^Niph. pass. t]"]^ 1 m., a seraph. nb^ 1 m., a prince, captain. § 43. nari l f., ark (e firm). ■SJJR 2 TO., midst; cons. 'SJIfl § 41. ^3in3 within me. nnblR pi. f., generations, history (see nbj). n^lfl /:, instruction, law (iTl'). finri prep., under, beneath, instead of.—8uS. ifinn. § 49. DOri to be complete, ended (§ 42). — Impf. DhV — Hiph. J3S5) bpijai Cohortative 1 sin^f. nbtlpX "1??^ nbtapN T ; liT • vav cons, ferf ^^^P.l &c. Inf. bbp las, nhs bPi^n Inf. absol. bit:)i lias bbp?, bb]3ri Phrt. ad. 55t?P "I?? i^p pass. bitJp btip; THE EEGULAR YERB. §5 20—28. 165 VERB. § 20—28. Pi' el Pual Hithpa'el Hiph'il Hoph'al bi?!?, bE)]? ^^P. b?i|?~ beipsnn ^'?il?.'7 ^^I?0 nbsj)? ^^^I? nbtoj5riri nybiJn n^PW n^% ^%1?" pi^^pf^D fi^^I^D i?5^i?6 ^^^1? nb^I5' . -Fi^^l?rin FiJ^l?ri FlJppM ^^^^1? ^nb^p ^n^taj^rin 'fi^^ipCi 'Fibbpn ^Stpi? ^Sipi5 siSaism ^b^t3i?n ^Stjptn OFi^il? DFib^i? dnbiisfiH nri^t:ij>n dPibtips-i |F>bl? IPi^^i? ■]ri^^i?)nn IFl^^lJD I^^^IPO ssbtai? ^3bbp ^ii^tai5fn iisbtajjn iiDbppn ■■■ 'b'^'2) ^^liii '^WT^''. iW- '5=^1?; ^W^ baijn ^W^'^ b^pjpn ^^i?P' ^wk^ bE)pn ^tsiJtiFi b'^pjJFi ^P)5F1 '^?I?F1 ^bS5)5R ^btpi^nn ^ytsjjri '^PPP^ ^ij?)?^ ^'^I?^ ^^l?ti^ b^PlJi? ^il?^ iibt:;?^ ^btpib': ^bttJijK': ^b^bji^ ^^?i?: •^;^ta')5n nsbta'ipi;! nibtsi^rin nibbi^Fi nsbbpFi t; -'; T !iSi2):n ^Stpi^p ^ibtpi^inri iiypjjri ^btjpn f^;^^I?Pi nsb^ijn n5^%rin nj^tjpn nsbapFi "^i?I?? "^^125 "^^)?"w '^'pi?5 ^'^^'l?3 ^^1?' ^W^y) ^Pipb ^bt5]3 ^b^i? wanting ^bc3pm sib^apn wanting ri:bt3j: nsbiaprin n3bc:j?n ^k: bt)i?^ "^^)?f^' "^PK &C. ^^l?".!] ^^i?;i ^^I^in'*;!! "^m -btpi?N!, ^^'^^'^k nb^bl^i? ^t?!? (b^i?) ^fi)15rn ^'P1?D O^^PO) bt?p, bia]5 ^ bt2^_ (^^pri^i) ^Pi?lI Op)?n) bra)2X: ^^pi?P ^'t:p/^ Ir bE)p5i btips 166 THE VEKBAIi SUFFIXES. EEGULAR VEKB. § 31. THE VERBAL SUFFIXES Qal Pctf. 3 s. m. i^.f. 2 s. «i. 2 s./-. Stiff. ^51 ^^)? rbat T ; »T ^"m FfctsR s. 1 c. ^?na3 ^3^tt)5 '■as "pnbtop "P'fi^^p 2 m. ^153 ^^1? ■ ^r^^I? 2/. &c. t]-tjb^p ^O^Vi? 3 TO. % ^rw- Ti'n^'a^ ^inri-in^ap ^nnbto]: 3/. '^^^I? nnStop " wnS'^p O^'f'^i? pi. 1 c. ^5^^1? isi^^Vi? iiin'b^p iiJnbtJp 2 m. "1^3 nsbtop 2/. IP^^i? 3 m, B^^l? dt^^ap DFlbtip D^Fibap 3/. 1^51? 1t>^^l? 1p6^p Tpfel? Impf. 3 s, »s. 3 pi. m. Jjwper. Suff. lap^ bbp^ ^itjp: 113 bbp sibpp S. ] c. ^aiai^ ^al5t:p^ "735^ "i^^Pl?': '113 ^i^tip "I53^i^^t3p 2 TO. ^l^i: ^^1?: ''"?^^i?: 2/. &c- tjbtjp: Tl^bpp: 3 TO, ^!^^^i?: sinbpp^ ^n^Pl5 &c. 3/. PI— rtpp^ O^^'PI?" "- 0^P12 as in pi. 1 c. isfe: 'is^'?!?': «^t5p imperf. 2 TO. ; - ; • •-* ! T 1 : • 'sii^ np^i^Pp': 2/. P^V)?: ■'"iP^^'Pi?: 3 TO. t3bt:p'; d^btip'' Qbpp 3/. i^T P^r. I^Pi? And so all parts So 2 jjZ. m., The first s yll. is half- of impf. ending and 2, 3 i)i /". open, e, g. ibn3. But in a Consonant. which becomes see infin. cons. — In Perf. i^Dfjn. 2 s. f. sometimes follows 2 s. m. THE VEEBAL SUFFIXES. REGULAR VEEB. § 31. 167 REGULAR VERB. § 31. Qal 3 s. c. 3 pi. c. 2 i)?. c. &c. as 3 fl. 1 pi. c. &c. as 3 fl. Impf. and imper. with n. T : - ■•.•:';• T : • v ; 't ^] ? ^sStSp^ It is doubtful if 1 pi. oc- 3urs with n. See Ps. IS. 8. Hos. 12. 5. J«;?». cons. 'ins bbip ''113 "5— "btip &c. (^n-f ) ibtj^ D3bt2p ":jn3 Clbp)3 The 1 pers. has re- gularly yerbal suff. of obj.; the others have nominal suff. whether of object or subject. Pi' el 3 s. m,. ibtpp nbtap ilibtJp DbtJi? nbtep" T V : *- I Dibtap'' fi^^l?'; V'-l 168 PE NUN VERB. § 33. PE NUN VERB. § 33, Qal Niph. 1E33 Hiph. Hoph. Perf. Sing. 3 m. m) i'sj TD3n 3/: niBM ilB'"'3n rnrisin 2m. ni^ag nman FiT^in T :- \ Impf. Sing. 3 m. i»a: be: 1S53: t^a^ TB3;; 3/: isap ben &c. TB-'ar) 2 m. TBan Ven TD^an 2f. "iran ^bssn "iD-'an Ic. isaM Vb« iras Plur. 3 m. sifflaf tibs: iiti^r %f. njfflan njbin nsTcatD 2m. iiT^an 5llbE3Fl !ns-'an 2f. njffian nsbin naiBari \c. Tzja? 'bb? 'li^M Imp. Sing. 2 m. (nifl?) laa bs? •<^m TDan 2/: "ffla ^^a? "'Tcasn "T^in Plur. 2 m. iiiaa !lb33 siTflaan ifflin ■wanting 2/: n4 nsbi: T ; ; retilsn niman Juss. 3 sing. ^5- vav cons. impf. 1253*5 ■ Cohort. 1 sing. niDaH T ; V nTDiK vav cons. perf. IT J -IT ; Inf. r«253 bS5 isasn "T • Ts^sn ^3n Inf. absol. T bisa TOsn lean fflsn Part. act. Tsab ^Bb Tija? ixrim pass. to T — tM PENUN VERB. § 33. PE NUN VERB. § 33. Qal Niph. Perf. Sing. 3 m. ?-? "15^ ' -jri? ,npb3 3/-. r!3M T :iT flJ^I?^ 2 m. T T -T Pl^P-^ 2 A &c. \c. "Pf)? Plur. 3 c. :iT 2 m. DPI13 2/-. Ic. sisnj Impf. Sing. 3 m. ip: ^i?: "in?! ,np^: 3/-. IPn njsn 2»j. l^P n]3n 2f. ^?nn ■"npFi \c. fi5n-in» np« Plur. 3 OT. ^Di^: tin]?: 3/: 2»i. ^3r]Fi ^ni?ri 2/-. Ic. n t^i?? /OTp. Sing. 2m. mP ,1F! •T^P ''^P 2/: "?PI 'ti? P^wr. 2 m. !i3n ^-I? 2/-. /mss. 3 S/W5'. n np.: vav cons, impf ]m n|3':i Inf. (■,n3)^PFi,nr}Tn]5,nr!D insn ,np^n Inf. ahs. liin3 TO vk Part. act. in'a ni5b pass. l^n3 npb IP? 169 Hoph. 170 PE GUTTUEAL VEEB. § 34. PE GUTTURAL Qal act. Stat. Niph. Psrf. Sing. 3 m. Dnn nay - T - T Dsri pm Dnn3 n7;3y3 - : V - vri'/ 3/. may T : IT "1??,5 2 m. may T ; — T m^ys ?/■ may : : - T rnays • 1 ~ vnv Ic. ^may "may?. Plur. 3 c. frt'ay : IT iiiayj 2»». nPil^?? Dmayi 2/. 1^1^? imayj Ic. ^nay ; — T 13'7??,3 /»!£/■. jSin^r. 3 m. Dnn'' nay DSIT' pTn-i nay^ 3/. layn Pm nayn " T C" 2 m. ibyn -: 1- PTDF) layn ■■ T r* 2/. ^layn " : — T" 'pm "layn • ; IT ■' Ic. v:IV pm nayx Piwn 3 m. ^'Tf?,! ^pm: "??: 3/. •^51'^??! ^tpm. ™7^?p] 2ot. ^nayn "Pm, viayn ; TT ** 2/. nii'aypi r : -: 1- nspTriFi tI;-v: IV !^nm Ic. i!ay5 Pm nays ■• Tl" Imp. Sing. 2 m. i!ay — ; pm nayn •• T 1" 2/ ^nay TI>^' ''nayn • ; FT •• Pfo.T. 2 m. ioay ^pm snayn 2/ njia? njipfn nsi^sn Jttss. 3 sm^. m^ cons. impf. ^a^.li p?a;3 Cohort. 1 simg'. may^ T ; viv vav cons. perf. mayi Inf. T;?yn Inf. absol. liay T ^ Dhns liay^ Pnrt. act. pass. nay n!iay &c. laya Tvav PE 'ALBPH VEKB. § 35. 171 VEEB. § 34. PE 'ALEPH. § 35, Hiph. Hopli. Qal • ; V • v:iv DFinri layn "^^ T ^' v: IV T : -v:iv nnayn * S " v: IV T : T IT I ; — ■« IT " ; — T! IT ■ v: IV *nasrj Dmayn " : - v: IV BFii^jn IV : - v: IV I V : - ■« IT 'i^'^it ■ "^'^s b^ik'^ TXjyn lasFi bi^n I'^ypi larn bi>5n -i^ayn ^^ayn ^bii^n 'J'^?? ^ayx b?i« ^'T'^i sna?^ ^bix^ n5ia?n ninaVn rebl^n ^Tx:?n TO^n 5SS4^F1 ?^^1^?i niiayn nsbii^n 'I'^i ' ''Ws "bsjis "ii??,6 Vsj? "I'^^O ^b?>i iiT'ayn wanting :ibi>^ "S^N "i^?;: (lai^S^) b5i^»i n'bii* &c. r'a?n vs 'i^a?0 &c. layn T &c. i^a?a b?i< &c. layg bw» 172 'AYIN GUTTUBAL VERBS. §-36. •AYIN GUTTURAL Qal Nipli'al Purf. Sing. 3 m. •orjir (Dnj) tirnp? Drip 3/. T -:iT T -; : • 2 m. Tjarm pdhai 2/. Fitirnij? Ic. "ntsriTB ■'rucriiB? Piwr. 3 c. "!IT ^tsnij;? 2 m. Qnanir Dnariiijs :^/. IPitJtt^ •jniariffl? 1 c. ; - T sistirnij: Impf. Sing. 3 m. tiriTfl'; tjJT\jji [3(13'' " T • « T • 3/ tSrtlSFl •• r • 2 m. arnpn ani^n 2/. • -I ; " • —; IT • Ic. •• 1 V Phw. 3 m. titsnizj': ■^ rr • 3/. T ; - I • T ; — T • 2 m. ~j rr • 2/ T ; ~ ; " Sl3t3)l'^Fl Ic. Imp. Sing. 2 m. tirna tarnsn Dnsn 2/. "PtJ^ ^pntffi Plur. 2 m. sioA 2/ T I - J T : — T • Jttss. 3 sing. (fee. vav cons. impf. 0)112*5 &c. impf.withsuf. ■ " T I • &c. Inf. nniBn Biisn Inf. absol. tiinia T oirnr? Bxrt. act. pass. tariTBD on: T ; • T" AYIN GUTTURAL VERBS. § 36 173 TERES. § 36. Pi' el Pu'al Hithp. v^ nn: i]t:a on? ^•inrin onDrin ns^a ni^a T : IT : • ^?'-5 np^in psb^nn Fi^ia ni'ia ^?^i'P'^ 'pi?'?5 "RS'iia • ; - T ; • lii-ia : IT : • DPisia oninia Dns^anrj 1??^=^ ]^Pi^ ■jFip'^ariri 15?'^5 ^si'iia ! - T : ■ VT: t]'ih': Dns": ?jnafi: Dnari': v^^ tj^atn ^^ann V^^ V^^ ^:):am ■^?:;?f> • ; J • : IT : • V^: '^'^^^: ^lainji! sons^ iis-ih';' : IT : • nssi^sn nji^hpi njpSann to'nnn : IT : • nss-isn TOSnhn r: - T : • ^■^t)?? ^'Ti^ v:^K^^ ^:}^ DD5 tl-iainn onDfin '?3 • : IT : • "■IT : IT ; " r: - T t: - T J • 174 LAMED GUTTUEAL VERBS. § 37. LAMED GUTTURAJi Qal Niph. Pi' el Pbrf. Sing. 3 m. lt-6 nbffl? nbiti 3/. Mtibifl nribujp rinbuj 2 m. nnfS Fin^TJj? nniip 2/. nribiB nnSiij? i^iri'iffl Ic. ^rinbi^ &c. &c. PZmt. 3 c. tin^^ 2 m. DnnSia 2/. Ic. sisnbTfl : - T Imig. Sing. 3 m. nbTpt nbiB: nbffl'; 3/. nb^n nbffin nbiBFi 2 m. nbijjn nbiBFi nbisn 2/ 'T^^Fl "ribi^Fi •'nb^Fi Ic. "bT?5?? nS^K nifflii PZwr. 3 m. sinb'uj': !inb^'^ tinbTD-; 3/. ninb'dn nsnA nDnliprl 2 m. sifibiijn iifibtin tuibiBri 2/. njnbijjri nsn'b'Sri nsnlffln Ic. - : • "'nbias - T« "nbfflii Imp. Sing. 2 m. nbiB nbifin nbiB 2/. ^nbiii ^nb^n PZwr. 2 m. iin^TB iinb^rj 2/ T : - ; ninb-Sn Jwss. 3 sing. vav cons. impf. impf. ivith suff. ■'Dhbui'; &c. Inf. rrbTp nbisn nbffl Inf. absol. riibuj ~ T nbifl? TO'ifl Bxrt. act. nbizj' nbffl? nbfflr ■pass. n^bifl " •* ~ t LAMED GUTTUKAL VERBS. § 37. 175 VERBS. § 37. Pu'al Hithp. rtld n^nffln nnVia nri^FiT^ri nniia Fl)l|Fll2Jri nri^T^ nri^rniin &c. ' &c. MmntJDfi nbnffl 1 n^FRiin 'V^lM**^ mr«23 n!3FKz5a Hiph. Hopb. ri-'birn Mbipn nti'^TJ'ti tln)^T) rfli^iin nnSiii!! nnSifin rin^TJjn ■'rin'biijn &c. iin''^T?:n DFinbiijn ifinbiijn tl'^T?- rtp; n^biin n^biiiri "n^'^TiFi ri^bTzix JirT^^'ia;; n;n^TB'n irj^buin nsnbifJFi '''i!''bTp5 nbipD wanting T ; ~ ; ~ nbia;: nbiB'fti - : — n'bipLi t^biin nbTlJn n^biiia nboa 176 liAMED 'ALEPH VERBS. § 38. LAMED 'ALEPB Qal NipL V&rf. Sing. 3 in. T T sba ■■ T ssa3 T ; • 3/. T ; rr nxba T ; IT nssas T ; : " 2 m. pii^ka riN^a O'i^^'fS 2/. nitsti nsiba nssa? Ic. "tissa Tix'^a • •• T "riida? Plur. 3 c. ma sixba ^J«S5J3 2 m Drixia 00^*^5 D?**^?? 2/. lP«sa l6»^^ li?^?'?? Ic. ilDKSa !fi»^a WidaD Trnjif. Sing. 3 m. m: &c. " T - 3/. iisan T I • " T " 2 m. Kisan ■• T ■ 2/. •Ksan • : IT • Ic. *^i?9 ^^^^ PZwr. 3 m. ma'': 3/. n55«kap T V : " T V T • 2jw. iissan :i«san I IT • 2/. nsxsan T V ; • nissan Ic. xsa? ' ^W Imp. Sing. 2 m. xVa T : Ksan 2/. ^«?a "i^san " ! IT ■ Flur. 2 »i. !ii«sa !i«san 2/. nsxsa nman iTmss. 3 sin^. mv cows, ijnjg/". vav cons, jperf. nxkasi &c. impf: with suff. *?'il^'?1 Inf. 'iisa ssan *• T • Inf. absol. »i:sa saa? Part. act. S2"a «ba «2:a5 pans. «sisa LAMED 'ALEPH VEBBS. § 38. 177 VERBS. § 38. Pi'el Pual Hitlip. Hiph. Hoph. s^sa Nsa Ksann i^-'san Hsan T i V nsisfa n^ka T " • nnaa as Fi. ns'^kan nstkan T ■' : • nxiian T •■ : \ &C. &c. nKsan "nxkan iiit-kan Dnxsari ■jrixsan iiDKkan » > ■ as Ph. m'^: T •., I IK^'^'W. • : - as as as K^san • : - as Niph. Qui Niph. i^^sjari '^s'^kan H'sai? iii^-'sa:: nsNsan sii^^kan nsKkan s-'^aa Qal K^^ Ksarin >^?ab wanting iiN'^kan nsxsan wanting ssa «sann s^san • : - s^san Hka ^^VTi K^aa ssaa xsana • : - Ksaa T : \ 12 178 PB TOD AND PE VAV VERBS. § 39. PE YOD AND PE Verbs Y'S. ' Qal Niph. ftjy. Smg. 3 m. a?; xn; nDl: 3/- nniBis 2 m. r ; - 2/. &c. Ic. PiMn 3 c. 2 «;.. 2/. Ic. ZiMg/". Sing. 3 m. ST?! ST"' T • •ayi 310^1'' 3/. iTSFl " T • 2 m. ^TBFl ■• T • 2/. ' : IT • Ic. ^^J^ •• T • f Zur. 3 JM. ^=1?: 3/. renifljri 2 m. : I" : rr • 2/. riDaicn ninajn Ic. "'^T?.? 'W3? /wjp. Sing. 2 m. (nsTB) atp SI" T ; (fflt!) TS'i ^ipjn 2/ • ! IT • PZwr. 2 m. tt;2 ^nffliin 2/. njnia T : -T • Jztss. 3 sing. vav cons. impf. affl?5 THTftT Cohort. 1 sing. naipK 1 Impf. in a with suff. ■'??T Iniper. !in51 Bifin. cons. V V i^T V V . aifljn dbs. TDi-l'' T Bzrt. act. ntp'' yjT aijia jjass. ISITIJ; TTSI'^* PE YOJ) AND PE TAV VERBS. § 39, VAV VERBS. § 39. 179 Hiph. Hoph. T • T : T ! - T ; - &c. &c. &c. aiar rnasin 3^^7J Verbs ""S. Qal Hiph. &c. pri PT.": ns^. prn P'?'F1 ps': prn P'P'Fl 'pr^ 'Pi'Pi ■ prx p'?'^ ^p'r: ^Pi'.' njprn •"'Sp?'?? W^ 'ipTPi njip^ri '^5i?^Fl "pr? "p'?'!3 p.rD ^pi'D •^5prD ' "p.r:: p.rD Verbs assimilating. Qal Niph. Hipk p^: m-'S" ns'' T1^S53 180 'AYIN VAV AND TOD VERBS. § 40. 'AYIN VAV AND /\/\«-»' ' Qal act. i .tot. U ! ■ ''~'iv^r»^'- -^J:^' Plrf. Sing. 3 m. t=i3 fi^ Bia , .^ - la 3/. ^Vk rnaH n33 T T 2 m. m T - niaa nja t; - 2/. Fiai? PM, i?TBa &c. Ic. ^Pi#- 'fM ^F«?a Plur. 3 c. iiajb sina iimisi 2 m. BPi'ai? BP)53 V - DF«pa 2/. 1P# IF!? IFnss Ic. «ap : - Zwi^. iSm^. 3 m. B^p; Ma; •B'fa;: r?: 3/ dsipn Tzjiat? ■j-'SFl 2in. n^ipn ^ziinti r?^ 2/. "^iapi • • T Ic. Q^px dinN! r?« Plur. 3 m. iiasip; iiTsii;: •T 3/. ns^b^ipn T ; •• TV • ! 2w. 'dilpFl iiffliift 2/. nra^ipn T : TV • : Ic. D^p3 ^zjins r?? /»tjj. 5m^. 2 m. nia^ip n^p M52 Tijia r=^ 2/. ^aiip ^TBi^ Tk PZw. 2 M». iiasip iifflia ia% 2/. njap T ; Jmss. 3 siw^r. op: If- mi; cons. impf. D1555 ]^'^ CoJiort. 1 siw^f. na^ipH n3;a» vav cons. peif. P>?15'! IT! - Inf. wp rm fflia n Inf. dbs. nip nla TBia I'D Rirt. act. nai5 Di$ na Tijia 1^ pass. na*ip wp VaiSQ 'A YIN VAV AND YOD VEEB8. § 40. 181 VOD VERBS. § 40. Niph. Hiph. Hoph. Dips. D^pn Dpsin n#5 fi'aT.r? napsin n&pD J?'i^'PO CTfpn ina*ip5 nia^pri napkin "n&pi ^nia^pq^j ^napiin ^aip5 la^pri siapsin nntop? Dpia^pn Dnapsin iptop5 ib^^^ipq ^napsin S13&P5 siaia^pw siDapiin Dip: b^p: 'rspr nipFi D-pn Dpiin Dipri D^pn Dpm •aipFi "xj-'pri •^apiin nSpK D^P« Dp*lN iiaip: sia^p; siap!)'' nsapn fi5?f?.^ riDapsiFi iiaipn iia-'pn 5ap!in niapn r!35?pn nsapiiFi Qip? 't3T5 " DpsiS Dipn na-'p.Dpri ^aipn ' '^a'^pn siaipn iia^pin njapn ™apn nia'-prn oipri " QTO Dpsn oipti 0^130 Dips B'l?a '• "'^"ip? y: na^pa Dpi- Forms of Intens. Act. Pass. B^lejc. D';P B.'ippn D52ip Daip D?jipm Dpap Dpapno' like Pi'el &c. of the Regular Verb. 182 VERBS DOUBLE 'A TIN. § 42. VERBS DOUBLE Qal Ptrf. Siny. 3 m. act. niD OP) t.-- Stat. b-a 3/. n^so (nao)^ r^y?. &c, 2 m. T - r\n 2/ niSD ni^l? Ic. "niao T'i^E Flur. 3 c. SQSD '(^b) '^'sp_ 2jm, - oni^ 2/. l^SD ^Xf^'?- Ic. !i3iap siii^p Z»w^. S'in^. 3 m. nb; ab-; ^K bfi": 3/- abn abn ^l?Pi ban 2jm. abn abn ^i?pi ban 2/. "'SDFl ^aan ■'^i'Fi 'ban Ic. abx absi ^i?** ba» Flur. 3 ?w. iiao; iias'] — ^^K ^ba': 3/. nsasn T ; ■ nj^^pn nj^'n 2 m. iiaOFl T siaBri ^Ijbn ^ban 2/. nrapn nnsFi nr^pFi nsban Ic. T ■ ';. ■ aoa T ^ab? ^^bE! ^bai Zwip- 'S'iw^'. 2 m. ab 2/. •l ao Pittr. 2»n. iiao 2/. s^r^? Jmss. 3 si/i^. ab-'' ab-; i^i?.: <&c. mv cons, imjif. ao5i TT- ab5 ^K!? Cohort. 1 stw^. naox T T ^??^ &c. vav cons, jperf. »:''=1?1 Inf. ab i'p^p Inf. ahsol. aiao T bibi? BiH. act. aaio nbp bi? pass. a' so VEEB8 DOUBLE 'AYIN. § 42. 183 AYIN. § 42. Niph. Hiph. Hoph. iP5 =^PD apiin nabi r\iap? ttiapa n^bn nlapri niapq napiin iniapsin ^niap3 ^ininpii siabi ^sbn driinps DmiaDn ^3iap3 iiii^pq sp: ap:^ ap; ap,'; ap^'' ipri aon &c. 3pn aon •■ T ^abn "^tbPi — V aoK •■ T Slab: Slab'' "T T V — ■ ns^apFi ^abn ^abn ■• T nrapn na^aopi T V ; ap? ao: •• T apn aon •■ T ^abn "^^K iiabn ^abn " T na/apn nrapn ap; ao^n Forms of Intens. Act. Pass. Beflex. % ipbi? bpbpnn like Fi'el &c. in the Regular Verb. apn ■ apn aisn apn nap3 aD3 napa apa aoin aaia 184 LAMEP HE (LAM. XOD AND VAV) VERBS. § 44. LAMED HE (LAM. YOD Qal Niph. Pi' el Pual l^n/f. Sing. 3 m. 3/. 2 TO. 2/. nnbas &c. tv'ba? nri).3 nba nnba tv-^a '■»"'•■ &c. Ic. ^n^Sa T''^M Flur. 3 c. ■^ba iiba? 2 TO. Dn^ba BD'1?M 2/. Ic. /mj/. /Sing'. 3 m. fi^a: nba: f^>51 nba"" 3/. "^?p> nban V \s 2 TO. rtari J^Jan 2/. ^^?p> •'ban Ic. nbax nbas Flur. 3 TO. sii^ tiba: 3/-. nrban ns^^an 2 TO. ^ban ^ban 2/. Ic. nr^ari /(Hjp. S'm^'. 2 m. nba ban nban ba nba 2/. ^ba -ban PZwr. 2 TO. ^ba 4n 2/. nr% "r^an JllSS. 3 Si»2^. TO. &c. ba^ ba: ba^ ' vat; cons. impf. &c. basi ~ i vav cons. perf. Kr%) n-basi Inf. niba niban riiba niba Inf. absol. rrba fTba? nba n'ba BirL act. nb- T^ ^ fi^?? ^)>y>? \ pass. n^siba "iiba T J T i nbaa stat. riffi— ntpp V \ : LAMED HE (LAM. YOD AND AND VA\0 VERBS. § 44. Hithp. Hiph. Hoph. nnbann nnbari nrtin T«l« T"BT nban? tty rta^ ba— n^am bah nban ban^ nibann nsanrj nkna ba'^ niban miban nb?n nban nbaa nbaa VAV> VERBS. § 44. 185 Suffixes. Pe)/. -Si??^. 1 c. "a-f "sba 2 m. i^l 2/. ^^5 3 m. ^n^a 3/. r^ba Flur. 1 c. !i3ba 2w. 2/. 3 m. Qba TT 3/. Imjjf. Sing. 1 c. ^?^?: 2 m. ^ba^ 2/. # 3 m. iJ^ba: 3/. nba^ TVS " Flur. 1 c. 2 m. 2/. 3 m. Dba"- .... 3/. /»jp. iSm^f. 1 c. -5b3 3 m. sinba 3/. nba T V ; PZwr. 1 c. ^3ba 3 m. Dba 1 86 TABLE OP MOKE COMMON NOMINAIi FORMS. TABLE OP MORE COMMON NOMINAL FORMS. r. FORMS FROM QAIi, CHTEFLT PARTICIPIAL. 1) ft — a (a — a), btJp 1; adj. of quality, though also noun. *lffi^ upright, 13'^ word. 2) a — e (a — i), btip 1; part, of Stat, verh, adj. of quality, 3) a — (a — u), bb]5, bitajS 1; part, of Stat, verb, adj. of quality, iti)5 little^ bilB great, Ij^ fearing. 4) e — a (i — a), bt3]5 1; less common nominal form, 2lb heart. "With pure-long vowel in Second Syll. — 5) a — u (a — u), btop 1; pass, part.; 6) a — i (a — i), ytj]? 1; also pass, part.; both also adj. 7) a — (a — a), bitip 1; nominal form, dib^joeace. 8; ' — d, "—a (i— a), bitip, bap, Tian ass, ar\3 look; and so b-'tip," 'btop, ''Vp? fool, bwa boundary. In all these forms the strong pure-long vowel has reduced the preced- ing vowel to an indistinct sound. With pure-long vowel in First Syll. — 9) 6 — e (a — i), btsip 3; act. part. 10) b — a (a — a), btjlp 1 ; noun, Obiy age. IL FORMS FROM QAL, CHIEFLY IKPmiTIYE. With short vowel after the first rad., less commonly aftei the second. — 11) « {(latT) bttjb, (btop) 2, fern, nbtip, (tibtap). 12) i (qitf) btojb, (bttp) 2, „ nbpp, (nbap). 13) («) (qoii) btaj?, (bbp) 2, „ nbtip, (n^bp). TABLE OF MOEE COMMON NOMINAL FORMS. 187 III. rOEMS ALLIED TO THE INTENSIVE. 14) a — a, a — d (a — a), btSp, bitap, adj. expressing halil, occupation &c. i^tSH sinner, MSti cook. 15) a — i, a — m, b'^tOp, b*lta]?, adj. of quality, in which the idea of intensity is not always prominent. '[T^^just, "IISH merciful. 16) i — d (i^— a), bitflj?, 113© drunken. 17) 2 — e, btSp 3; adj. expressing excess and defect, IV. FOEMS "WITH EXTERNAL AUGMENTATION (EXTENSIVE). "With preformative letters, m, t, ' — 18) i — a (a — a?), b'a]?53 1, 1 Nouns expressing the place and 19) a — e (a — i), btipM 3, J instrument of the action, and also notions less precise, 11^053 hiding-place, t^riS52 key, tJBTBa judgment. The two forms given are perhaps most common, but words formed with m assume great variety of form, as i — d (i — a), i — e; a — d (a — a). 20) a — u, b^tJpI^, abstracts, and chiefly in weak verbs and of various forms. 21) a— a, btJpX 1; adj. njSK lying. With afformative letters, m, n, i. 22) an, dm, ibtOj? &c. 1 ; nominal forms. "jS^bs^ widower, inblB taile, Db^X porch. 23) dn (an), dm (am), "jibtip Ac, "jlabK rvidowhood, ■]i"'riS interpretation. The « falling away the termin. becomes 6. 24) f. The termin. « forms Gentilic and Patronymic words. '^'^4? a Hebrew., ''^T'^? Sidonian, and more rarely adj. from ordinary nouns, ''bj'1 /bo/ (on foot), "'Pint] ^ower. The termination m appears only in fern, uth See following Table. 188 TABLE OF INPLECTTON OF NOUNS. TAELE OF INFLECTION OF NOUNS. T 1. Words ending in a consonant: — Mas. Fern. ' aba. cons. abn. cons. Sing. DiiD CilD nWD ro% plur. UWO "WD niD% nio^o dual tsrxPiti "MD Q:hDSlD 11. Words ending in a vowel sound: — sing. "IDS "^53 n^n- n'''^53 • ;t • ;t t ■ 'IT plur. QIS'I- - D^-iM "?':m nis-iM ms'iM sing. nttba id. plur. rriss^a id. Rem. 1. Besides words ending in a vowel sound, certain others may form the fem. by addition of the simple Tav. See First Decl. 2. The pliir. mas. has sometimes ]"< — as in Aramean. DECLENSION. Many forms of Nouns contain unchangeable vowels, that is, vowels pure-long, or diphthongal, or unchangeable from position. These as they suffer no change in inflection do not seem to require classification. Or they might be called a First Declension, in which case the Declensions would amount in all to four. Indeclinable Nouns, i. e. Nouns that undergo no change in vowel, are such forms as those in Table p. 186, 187 numbered 8, 14, 15, 16, 20, 23, and a great number of other forms not given in that Table. If those Nouns with unchangeable vowels be assigned a place in the Classification and called a Declension, it is obvious that a form should be assumed as Paradigm which is essen- tially unalterable, and not such a word as D^O which is a Segholate and unaltered only accidentally. TABLE or ITSTFLECTION OF NOTINS. 189 The forms that suffer change are those having tone-long vowels. These vowels, having been rarely expressed by the Consonantal letters, § 2, may very generally be distinguishecl from pure long and diphthongal vowels which were very often so expressed. In general only qame^ and pere are tone-long in nouns, holem being for the most part unchangeably long. In Verbs holem is changeable like qam. and pere. The forms with Changeable vowels seem capable of being generalized under three classes, which may be called De- clensions: — First Declension. Words with a (— ) in the Tone, or in the Pretone, or in hoth. Second Declension. Segholates; i. e. words originally mono- syllabic, with a short vowel, which stood generally after the first radical, though sometimes after the second. Third Declension. The Act. participles Qal; and words ending like them in e {-^') and having the vowel of the Tre- tone unchangeable either by nature or position . 190 TABLE OF FIRST DECLENSION. § 18. TABLE OP FIRST Words having a in the Tone, or in 1. 2. 3. 4. sing. ■)T2'' cons. "1^'] IVl? ?!?! V" ■'53' bina bi^a bto|5 pi. w^m^ I =w D^?15| D^bhs &c. cons. '''nuj'^ ^31?i ^bna du. D"'"n2'' •i- t: &c. cons. •''np') R "1 - pina" fem. fiyXT' T T : ™^I? nspT nsna' np^ina &c.' cons. sniTB'; nDi5T ni"]! pi. ni-iTT'; niapT nis'na cows. fiillB'' niDpT niiii dM. D'^ri'nffl^ cons. Tl'TliJ'' sing. tJin "'91^ p^r 1st <5utt. cons. D5)l pto cows, '^ain sin^r. -inj ^m 2nd Gutt. cons. '-|J^|| pi. D'"]np cows. ■''ih5 f^P?? &c. sin^. yai rt53TD — •■ T - T «>np 3rd cons. y;B'] naip nha Outt. cons, ''yp'i D'-naia ^naijj "nais* ! ' ^ 1 unchangeable vowels. "na litt ^s© ^ [sing. bp ^ -^ i#. t]^'?P on ™ n-b s%. ns; cows. rtS"' TT T T ibia nibTB ^^ba ->iba jjZ. d""?;' fi^^ba cons. ''S'' fii's' M?? ^'!ba' r^ba TABLE OF riKST DECLENSION. § 18. 191 DECLENSION. the Pretone, or in both. § 18. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. T1?S ^?5? dbiy T T : • T ; • ■ji^ST b^E(3 TpQ - : Dbi:5> T^^?i bfe &c. • T : d-abis • T ■ :■ a-b^p -nab -abiy •• : &C. ..... - - : • Cbtip) niaab r : ^iv r^bt;i55j ^'Q^b D'bs-n ^5^1^!? 'bs-n T ( • &c. b^i?^ b5»:a D'bs^p "bSNa "I - - f^biX7^' ^bsxa inibi^a nibsi p^ f ■ ^. ^^ i^- ^ OS . (M l-H . fi ^ f 1=1- o ? o „ S 'S O: O" O. O. O. O. O. JO- X>. fi' *\r ft-'Vi- "rt" fl> ]B EH o " s ;^ J"* I— i~" £5' ?!" Hi n- I *^ vpi p' n R. n I?" 6 & & '^ "^ J3=^ S: fl' S' S' n- fl' J3 n n ^ ^ a 'a 9 9 '' rr*^ S-£ ' 5>K =^aSs §i*-~i»^. ■S oi^ OfS 5,S OTS o-P'qS'S S^'S TABLE OF SECOND DECLENSION. § 29. 195 egg R ^f :^ n G=V." 15- S^§: M-M-M- ^g' **'£ £ M-- M- M- '^fa 1 9 W /!• 1^ ^'$: f .9" .9' /-I J- S^ " ^rt^H g. £.g. fc' fc f • fc' ^' ?' t?r I- s o g g SI, -ss 8 s g^ § s § s^ g -g js g g 5^ s T3iS p\ Pk ?» ■;r 196 ADDITIONAL NOTES ON SECOND DECLENSION. ADBITIONAL NOTES ON SECOND DECI.ENSION, p. 192, 193. The Declension consists of Monosyllabic Words having a short vowel after the first radical. Through the weight of the ac- cent the short vowels — ( — ) and — ( — ) become — and — and a furtive Seghol slides in before the last radical. The words thus become dissyllabic and penacute. Thus — Bule 1. The dissyllabic form appears when third radical is final. 2. Inflectional additions permit the primary form qatl, qifl, qofl to appear; 3. "Which it does everywhere except in Plur. The Plur, takes pretonic — like words of First Declens. 1. Some of this class of words have the short vowel after the second radical, but the method of inflection is the same as in the ordinary form. All Infinitives have the vowel after the second radical. In many words, however, which seem to have been originally of this form, the vowel has become fixed in its- place after the second radical and is treated as unchangeable. See First Decl. Add. Note 4. 2. Again when the vowel is after the second letter it may retain its place, not by becoming unchangeably long, but by duplication of the final consonant, as in First Declens. See there Add. Note 5. 3. Many words having first vowel l^eghol in the uninflected form have i (-^) under inflection, and in the oblique forms are thus not to be distinguished from words of the second class. It is the practice of the best Qrammarians, certainly, to con- sider such words to be of the first (or A) class, with their a (-^) thinned to i ( — ), a refinement which thus must have taken place in a very large number of words. It seems not impossible, however, that the ^eghol in many of these words^ may be a real second class vowel, and consequently the words ADDITIONAL NOTES ON SECOND DECLENSION. 197" Segholates of the second form. For first, some of these words have an alternative form with fere; and second, very many of them are derivatives from Intransitive verbs, which usually give Segholates of second (or third) class. Comp. § 29. For i (— -) there occasionally appears e (^7-); and for (—} also u ( — ). The word DDE' may be of first class, a being thinned to e. 4. A few Segholates, chiefly of those having their third ra- dical a guttural, prefer in the cons, forms with the short vowel after second radical, as in First Declens. (see the converse there Add. Note 3). For ex. j;BJ, nnp, inn from j?DJ, iriD, Tin, and the numerals seven and nine, § 48. Some have both forms, e. g. along with the ordinary forms yy and IJB'. 5. A very few phtr. abs. are formed without the pretonic a ( — ), e, g. the numerals twenty, seventy, ninety, and some other words of which the sing, does not occur, e. g. DiJCB pistaccia nuts, comp. Josh. 13. 26, D^J3n ebony, D^DpB' sycamores. 6. The derivatives from verbs n"b (i. e. 1"^ and i"h) exhibit many anomalies, examples of which are seen in the exx. given, but only E.eading or the Concordance can teach the full details. 198 ADDITIONAL NOTES ON THIRD DECLENSION. ADDITIONAL NOTES ON THIRD DECLENSION. The participles active and other words ending in c (jere), with a vowel unchangeable, either from quality or position, in the pretone, may be considered a class by themselves, and called a Third Declension. Hule 1. The final e ( — ), when by inflection it falls into an open unaccented syllable, is lost, becoming sh'va; and of course in a shut or half open syllable it becomes short, e or i ( — or -p). 2. In the const, e (-— ) remains or becomes a (-j-). svng. cons, voe. siiff. cons, sujf. eons, tuff, pi. bap bap "hap ijip ^P.9 1SDD r?"3? bi?D — 1 " rn?* 'S? &c. &C. °9^S? 15DD nayin* nasD m-iDts* vr » • rDjjiB ngsD' n nasD ■ "»m3DD Vlf -, • r- t • ni3j;in n13SD nnaDD 1. In participial words e ( — ) generally remains in cons., rarely becoming a (-^), Deut. 32. 28, except before Gutturals, though it may remain even before them 2 Kings 7. 10. In other words — - is the prevailing vowel, though — may be found, nnSD Is. 22. 22, bgp Gen. 30. 37. 2. In the hurried construct and with strong fem. additions, the — of the pretone is frequently thinned to — , and the words are not to be distinguished from corresponding parts of the form miqfal, of first declension. Occasionally the consciousness of deri- vation from mag^el becomes entirely lost, and the inflection pro- ceeds upon the type miqfdl, e. g. J^TO fork, plur. nlJ^TD. Some- times both forms appear, nll2J>D and n1^^J?D from a sing, only found in cons. ^3J!D, the abs. of which may have ended in a or e. The task of the Lexicographer here is nowise easy. ADDITIONAL NOTES ON THIED DECLENSION. 199 3. The law of inflection of this class of words extends itself to the fern., which however commonly adopts the segholate end- ing, § 29. But in the fem. the long — shews a considerable proclivity to remain, as in first declens. (see there Add. note 4); e. g. in participial forms which have become substantives, and in words having abstract meaning, as ni^^ she who bears, mj'3 traitoress, DEtS'DD enchantress, riDD*^' the desolate, n^UlFl abomination, n3|;np overthrow, nCHIFl deep sleep &o. The e remains even in masculines in pause. Also in the two words E'jti', j;3T of the third, of the fourth, generation. These remarks, without enumeration of all particulars, may suffice to indicate the lines in which exceptions shew them- selves. 4. The vowel o (- — ) in nouns, except in third class of segholates, is usually unchangeable. Even when, from formation of fem, by adding the simple Tav, 6 arises out of o or fl, it usually gives place to these vowels again in the phtr., § 29. 2. In a few nouns however with this fem. ending, and in some others, the vowel is treated like e of this third declension, in the samg way as it is in verbs; e. g. rhibi plur. rfhibi, np^no plur. nipbriD, njra plur. nijn3, )1d-)n plur. nua-iN, npa plur. Debts', "|1B3 plur. onBa; probably the last is from a sing, gipporeih, and even 'arm'noth may imply a sing, 'armoneth. :200 TABLE OP SOME COMMON IREEG. NOUNS. TABLE OP SOME COMMON IRREG. NOUNS. ax father, cons. "SX, my f. ''3JJ, thy f. ^•'^, his f. !lfT'q» or rajj, her f. H'^qK, your f. Dl3''aN, their f. Dtl'^ax &c., piur. niax. ns brother, cons. s. "'tis, cons. pi. ''H^; with four heavy suff. to sing, like father. My b. ''ttlj &c., pi. D''tl!S, "ns &c. but rns. TV flinx sister, cons. t\im, svff. ^tfWi^ &c. ; pi. with suff. Ttff^, Dn'^ri'-'ns, but also ^^ri™^, ns'^inins. TB-'S man, a form thinned from TBpX ; pi. D''1D5N, cows. •'fflSS; also rarely D''ffi''fc$. niBSJ woman, wife (i. e. »n5''^5 or FlTBiJ), hence cows, flltfj*, my w. ^FlIBK; i?/. D'^TCJ 1, cons. "'123. Ez. 23. 44 nlBS. ntt« 1 ffiazrf, pi. ninaK i, sM/f. ^nhax. t\'% 2 AoMse, cows. t\''3, pi. CinS, probably bdttim, cons. •'pa. " T •JSI 3 son, cons. "iSl, "IS (also '•SS, 153 with cons, termi- nation); suff. ""Sa, fjSS &c.; pi. CSS 1, cons, ''ia, suff. IDS &c. ' ' ~ T ■T\% 2 daughter, my d. "na (for "1^53 &c.); i>/. ni33 1. Dri father-in-law, like HX. Di*" 2 rfflj/ (i. e. DV), j>Z. D'^a;; (for "V); cons. ''a\ ''bSl wesse/, SM/f. ^'b^; pi. D"*!??, cons. ""bS, suff. ^S. d^a ;>;. wa^er, cons', "^a, '^a''^, sM>f. '-a'^a', ¥j''a''a &c. ^•'S? 2 ceYy, pi. Q''^'S, cons. ^^2^. ilQ mouth, cons. *'B, my m. ^'B, tj''Ei, 1''D and illT'B, tV^, ' Dtl'^E &c. like IK; js/. D''D, mi^B. 1234^1 2 head, pi. D'^lB^n, cows. "'TSi^'n. nti name, sw/f. ''530, ^ati &c. PI. niaffi, cows. jniaiB. MOBRISOK AND OIBB, PRINTERS, EDJKBURaU. T. & T. Clark's Publications. ^)^t ^nUxnuixmul Critkal Cumm^nlarg 0n t|[e f^olg Scriptarea of tjfj ©lb anti Nefa Ceatammtg, UNDER THE EDITOESHIP OF The Rev. S. R. DRIVER, D.D., Oxford; the Rev. A. PLUMMER, M.A., D.D., Durham; and the Rev. C. A. BRIG6S, D.D., New York. 7716 time has come, in the Judgment of the projectors of this enterprise, when it is practicable to combine British and American scholars in the production of a critical, comprehensive Com- mentary that will be abreast of modern biblical scholarship, and in a measure lead Its van. The Commentaries will be international and inter-confessional, and will be free from polemical and ecclesiastical bias. They will be based upon a thorough critical study of the original texts of the Bible, and upon critical methods of interpretation. ' The publication of this series marts an epoch in English exegesis.' — British Weelcly. ' This series seems likely to surpass all previous enterprises of the kind in Great Britain and America.' — Methodist Times. The First Three Volumes are now ready, in post 8uo, price 12s. each, Deuteronomy. By S. E. Driver, D.D., Regius Professor of Hebrew, and Canon of Christ Church, Oxford; formerly Fellow of New College, Oxford. Romans. By W. Sandat, D.D., LL.D., Lady Margaret Professor of Divinity, and Canon of Christ Church, Oxford ; and Rev. A. C. Headlam, B.D., Fellow of All Souls College, Oxford. Judges. By G. F. Moore, D.D., Professor of Hebrew in Andover Theological Seminary, Andover, Mass., U.S.A. (1) Of Professor Dkivee's ' BEUTEBONOMY,' The Beview of the Churches says: ' Never before in any English book has there been such splendid and profitable use of the vast stores that lie to hand in Archseology. ... If in the volumes that are to come, for and against are given "with the same frankness, and the author's own opinions indicated with equal modesty, and as little done to carry conviction with a rush, the publishers will have rendered a service to biblical students the like of which they have not received for the last hundred years.' Professor G. A. Smith (in The Critical Remew) says : ' The series could have had no better introduction than this volume from its Old Testament editor. . . . Dr. Driver has achieved a commentary of rare learning and still more rare candour and sobriety of judgment. ... It is everywhere based on an independent study of the text and history ... it has a large number of new details : its treatment of the religious value of the Book is beyond praise. We find, in short, all those virtues which are conspicuous in the author's previous works, with a warmer and more interesting style of expression.' <2) Of Professor Sandat's 'ROMANS,' Principal F. H. Ohase, D.D., Cambridge, says: ' We welcome it as an epoch-making contribution to the study of St. Paul.' (3) Of Professor Mooee's 'JUDGES,' The Uxpository Times says: 'It is probable that Dr. Moore's Commentary on Judges will come as a deep surprise to many in this country. It is not in any respect, so far as we have been able to judge, of lighter weight than the two great volumes of this series which appeared before it.' *,* A Prospectus giving full details of the Series, mith list of Contributors, vnll be sent post free on application to the Publishers, Messrs. T. & T. Clark, 38 George Street, Edinburgh. T. & T. Clark's Publications. EDITED BY Professors S. D. F. SALMOND, D.D., and C. A, BRIGGS, D.D. This Library is designed to cooer the uihole field of Christian Theology. Each iiolume is to be complete in itself, while, at the same time, it mill form part of a carefully planned whole. It is intended to form a Series of Text-Books for Students of Theology. The Authors will be scholars of recognised reputation in the several branches of study assigned to them. They will be associated with each other and with the Editors in the effort to provide a series of oolumes which may adequately represent the present condition of inuestigatlon. ' The " International Theological Libi'ary," to which we have already learned to look for the best and most recent in the historical, literajy, and linguistic study of the Bible.'— President W. E. Hakper, of Chicago University, in The Biblical World. The First Three Volumes of the Series are now ready, viz. ; — An Introduction to the Literature of the Old Testa- ment. By S. E. Driver, D.D., Kegius Professor of Hebrew, and Canon of Christ Church, Oxford. Fifth Edition, with Appendix. Post 8vo, price 12s. Christian Ethics. By Newman Smyth, D.D., Author of 'Old Faiths in New Light,' ' The Eeality of Faith,' etc. Third Edition. Post 8vo, 10s. 6d. Apologetics ; or, Christianity Defensively Stated. By A. B. Bruce, D.D., Professor of Apologetics and New Testament Exegesis, Free Church CoUege, Glasgow. Third Edition. Post 8vo, 10s. 6d. (1) Of Professor Dkivek's ' INTEOD UCTION,' The Times says :— ' The service which Canon Driver's "book will render in the present confusion of mind on this great subject, can scarcely be overestimated.' The Oiiardian says:— 'By far the best account of the great critical problems connected with the Old Testament that has yet been written. ... It is a perfect marvel of compression and lucidity combined. A monument of learning and well- balanced judgment.' (2) Of Dr. Newman Smyth's 'CHEISTIAN ETHICS,' The Soohnan says:- 'There is not a dead, dull, conventional line in the volume. It is the work of a wise, well- informed, independent, and thoroughly competent writer. It removes a reproach from our indigenous theology, Ms a glaring blank in our literature, and is sure to become the text-book in Christian Ethics.' The Methodist Times says:— 'It is so beautifully clear, devoid of dnlness, and has so many "bursts of eloquence," that it will take the reader who considers Christian Ethics for the first time under his tuition literally by storm.' (3) Of Professor Bkuce's ' APOLOGETICS,' Th4 Expository TiTnes says : — ' The force and the freshness of all the writings that Dr. Bruce has hitherto published have doubtless led many to look forwai'd with eager hope to this work j and there need not be any fear of disappointment. It has all the characteristics of the author's personality. ... It will render an inestimable service.' The British Weekly says ;— ' In this noble work of Dr. Bruce, the reader feels on every page that he is in contact with a mind and spirit in which all the conditions for a genuine apologetic are fulfilled.' *,* A Prospectus giving full details of the Series, with list of Contr&rutors, will be sent post free on applicaiion to the Publishers, Mesm-s. T. & T. Clark, S8 Gteorge Street, EdMwgh. T. & T. Clark's Publications. The Christian Doctrine of Immortality. By Kev. 8. D. F. Salmond, D.D., Professor of Systematic Theology, Free Cburch College, Aberdeen. Just published, demy 8vo, price 14s. 'For conuenience' sake the subject of the booh is describett as the Christian Doctrine of Immor- tality. But it will be seen that the word "Immortality" is used in the large sense u/hich Paul giiies it uihen he speaks of "this mortal" putting on "immortality," Life, eternal life, the immortality of the man, not the immortality of the soul, is the message of the Bible, alilie In Old Testament and In New, in Ohrist and in apostle. In John and in Paul, , . , The questions with which this booh deals are not questions to be taken up lightly or disposed of easily. No one who understands their seriousness will be in haste to write of them. , . . The studies which its pre- paration have occasioned have been at times an anxious discipline. The result has been to confirm me in the eonaiction that the teaching of Christ and the whole burden of the Christian Reuelation matie the present life ctecisioe for the future,'~From the Author's Preface. SuMMAKY OP Contents : — The Ethnic Pkepakation. — Introductory — ^Ideas of Lower Races — Indian, Egyptian, Babylonian, Assyrian, Persian, and Greek Beliefs. The Old Testament Pkbpaeation. — Kegative and Positive Aspects of Old Testament Preparation — The Notes of Old Testament Preparation — The Contribution of the Poetical Books, the Prophets and Ecclesiastes. Christ's Teachinq. — General Considerations — Doctrine of the Return — Doctrine of Judgment — Doctrine of the Resurrection — Intermediate State — Doctrine of Final Destinies. The General Apostolic Doctrine. — Apostolic Doctrine and Non-Canonical Literature — Teaching of James, Jude, Hebrews, and the Apocalypse — Doctrine of Peter and John. The Pauline Doctrine. — General Statement — Particulars of Paul's Doctrine — Paul's Doctrine of the ResuiTectiou. Conclusions. — The Contribution of Christianity to the Hope of Immortality — Doctrines of Annihilation and Conditional Immortality — Eestora- tionism and Allied Doctrines— The Alternative Doctrine. Appendices. Indices. The Brotherhood of Mankind : A Study towards a Christian Philosophy of History. By Kev. J. Howard Crawford, M.A., Abercorn. Just published, in post 8vo, price 5s. *»* The object of this book is to show that the end towards which mankind are progressing is a united brotherhood. This goal of mankind is the key to human history, which unfolds a steady progress towards its realisation. Contents : — Introduction. — Development of Christianity in Human Thought — Time the Interpreter— Ethical Purpose of Development. The Brotherhood of Mankind. — Brotherhood before Christ — Unity of Man — Jesus the Carpenter — Theology of Jesus — Ethical Principle of Jesus — Authority of Jesus — Brother- hood in the Epistles— Individualism — The Family— Sacraments — Entrance into the Life of Brotherhood— Christian Personality— Brotherhood in Early Church; In Middle Ages ; Since Reformation— Social and Political Progress— Service of Literature and Art— Natural Growth of Altruism— Christianity and Patriotism —Opposition of Scepticism— Other opposing Forces— The Kingdom of God and the Church— The Future. ' A remarkable book. . . . The Church of Scotland has reason to congratulate herself that a book marked by such a truly catholic spirit, such a cultured tone, and full of such courageous criticism should have issued from one of its country manses.' — Glasgow Herald. T. & T. Clark's Publications. Morality and Religion. By Rev. James Kidd, D.D., Glasgow. In demy 8vo, price 10s. 6d. ' "We are not acquainted with any other book that has so clearly shown the vital unity between religion and morality. ... It is a strong book by a strong man.' — Methodist Times. ' We know of no original writer in English who, with such mastery of the points at issue, and such philosophical method in their handling, has united a devout evangelical and orthodox view of Christian doctrine. ... It is the work of a master of psychological analysis.'— TAe Record. ' Dr. Kidd has written a remarkable volume, able, learned, closely reasoned, thoughtful, and clearly and eloquently expressed. . . . We had not read much before we found ourselves in the grasp of a man who can think and can vividly express his thoughts. The old, old theme on which a hundred generations have thought and written, became new in his hands, and we found ourselves taking part in a fresh and vigorous discussion.' — Professor J. Iveeach, D.D., in The Thinker. The Ethics of the Old Testament. By Bey. W. S. Bruce, M.A., Banff. In crown 8vo, price 4s. Summary of Contents : — Introductory — Ethical Character of the Old Testament Revelation — Determinative Principle of Morality in the Old Testament — Israel, the People of God's Possession — Israel's Code of Duty— Law of the Ten Words —The First Table— The Second Table— Old Testament Legislation— Mosaic Legislation — Old Testament View of a Future Life — Advance and Development — Ethics of Later Judaism — Moral Difficulties of Old Testament. ' An excellent work. ... I have found it most interesting and instructive. I hope that the book may have the success which it well deserves.'— Professor E. Flint, D.D., LL.D. * We have read this book with a great deal of pleasure. ... It is really a work of practical value.' — Free Church Mon&ly. ' A welcome and able book.' — United Presbyterian Magazine. The Bible Doctrine of Man; or, The Anthropology of Scripture. By Eev. J. Laidlaw, D.D., Professor of Systematic Theology, New College, Edinburgh. New Edition, Eevised and Ee-arranged. In post 8vo, price 7s. 6d. ' The standard work in English on the Anthropology and Psychology of the Bible. ... A volume worthy of its subject, and likely to hold the fli'st place in it for many days to come.' — Expository Times. ' Dr. Laidlaw's excellent treatise on " The Bible Doctrine of Man." ' — The late Eev. E. W. Dale, D.D. The Resurrection of the Dead. By the late Professor W. MiLLiGAN, D.D. Second Edition, in crown Svo, price is. 6d. ' In the treatment of such passages as these, Dr. Milligan's thoughtfulness, judgment, and scholarship reach their highest expression. We can but lament that this is the last volume for which we shall be indebted to him.' — The Record. 'There is the touch of the exact scholar on every page, and it brings out beauty that is truth, and truth that is beauty to our continual enjoyment.' — The Expository Times. ' This book is a most valuable one, and enables us to realise how much the Christian Church lost by the death of such a scholar and thinker.'— Olasgou) Herald. T. Clark's Publications. The Earliest Life of Christ ever Compiled from the Four Gospels, being 'The Diatessaron of Tatian.' Literally- translated, from the Arabic Version, and containing the Four Gospels woven into One Story. With an Historical and Critical Introduction, Notes, and Appendix, by Rev. J. Hamltn Hill, B.D. In demy 8vo, price 10s. 6d. The Bishop of Glouckstee and Bristol writes : — ' This is a work of very great importance, and of unique interest. It has been given to the world in an admirable form, and reflects the greatest credit on the able and conscientious Editor. The history of the work, as told in a clear and well-written Introduction, will enable the reader to appreciate the vast care and pains that have been bestowed on this singular recovery of the iiret Harmony of the Gospels. The Notes are short, clear, and helpful ; and the eleven Appendices of a practical value, which the general reader will as fully recognise as the scholar and critic. Mr. Hamlyn Hill has performed the difficult duty of Editor with conspicuous success.' ' Truly an excellent piece of work, which we commend most warmly to the student and to the general reader. ... A fascinating volume.' — Church Bells, Syntax of the Moods and Tenses in New Testament Greek. By Ernest D. Burton, Professor of New Testament Literature and Interpretation, Chicago University. In large 12mo, pp. xxii-215, price 5s. 6d. net. 'A valuable book. ... I venture to express the hope that arrangements may be made to facilitate its circulation in this country.' — Professor W. Sanday, D.D., Oxford. ' A full, careful, and serviceable book.' — Professor Marcus Dods. 'For use in colleges, for ministers, and all who desire to arrive at the exact meaning in English of the sacred text, this scholarly volume will be of the greatest service.' — Methodist Recorder. Sources of Nevr Testament Greek ; or, The Influence of the LXX. on the Vocabulary of the New Testament. By Eev. H. A. A. Kennedy, D.Sc. In post 8vo, price 5s. ' Dr. Kennedy urges his case with a wealth of learning, the result of much patient investigation on his part. ... A most valuable contribution to a very important subject. His book will be a sine qua non to all ministers who can read the original.' — Methodist Times. ' Dr. Kennedy has furnished us with a help to the knowledge of the Greek of the New Testament, which was urgently needed, and which satisfies the requirements. No investigation of the subject, either so thorough or so lucid, exists in any language.' — British Weekly. Commentary on St. Paul's Epistle to the Ephesians. By Rev. J. Maopherson, M.A., Findhorn. Demy 8vo, price 10s. 6d. ' It is an advance, and a great one, on anything we yet possess. . . . The author goes to the root, and neglects nothing that usually comes under the eye of a careful student. . . . Besides all this, the book is a living book. One is conscious of the heart of a man in it, as well as the brains.' — Methodist Times. ' This is a very handsome volume which Mr. Macpherson has given us, and without any doubt it will take the first place among the commentaries devoted to this Epistle. The Introduction is fuller far than we have ever had.'— fAe Expository Times. T. & T. Clark's Publications. BEYSOHLAG'S NEW TESTAMENT THEOLOGY. Neiv Testament Theology; or, Hisix)rical Account of the Teaching of Jesus and of Primitive Christianity according to the New Testament Sources. By Dr. Willibald Beyschlag, Professor of Theology at Halle. Translated by Eev. Neil Buchanan. In Two Volumes, demy 8vo, price 18s. net. ' It is not only very able, but it is a truly valuable contribution to its subject, and no one who takes upon himself to expound the deep things of God as set forth by the New Testament writers should neglect to make an earnest study of it, and thus enrich their ministrations of the word.' — Professor A. S. Peake, M.A. ' Dr. Beyschlag has achieved so large a measure of success as to have furnished one of the best guides to an understanding of the New Testament. . . . These pages teem with suggestions. ... In the belief that it will stimulate thought and prove of much service to ministers and all students of the sacred text it expounds, we heartily commend it to our readers.' — Methodist Recorder. ' A book of much interest and importance, independent in conception and treatment; happy in seizing and characterising the com-ses of thought with which he has to deal ; ingenious in combination, and acute in criticism; expressing the results which he reaches, often with terseness and point, almost always with clearness and vigour. . . . The work well merits translation into English.'— Professor W. P. Dickson, D.D., in Tlie Critical Review. WENDT'S TEACHING OF JESUS. The Teaching of Jesus. By Professor Hans Hinrich "Wesdt, D.D., Jena. Translated by Kev. John Wilson, M.A., Montreux. In Two Volumes, Bvo, price 21s. ' Dr. Wendt's work is of the utmost importance for the study of the Gospels, both with regard to the origin of them and to their doctrinal contents. It is a work of distinguished learning, of great originality, and of profound thought. The second part [now translated into English], which sets forth the contents of the doctrine of Jesus, IS the most important contribution yet made to biblical theology, and the method and results of Dr. Wendt deserve the closest attention. . . . No greater contribution to the study of biblical theology has been made in our time. A brilliant and satisfactory exposition of the teaching of Christ.' — Professor J. Iverach, D.D., in The Expositor. ' Dr. Wendt has produced a remarkably fresh and suggestive work, deserving to be ranked among the" most important contributions to biblical theology. . . . There is hardly a page which is not suggestive ; and, apart from the general value of its con- clusions, there are numerous specimens of ingenious exegesis thrown out with more or less confidence as to particular passages.' — Tlie Critical Remeie, Dr. E. F. HORTON refers to Beyschlag's ' New Testament Theology ' and AVendt's ' Teaching of Jesus ' as ' two Invaluable books.' Messianic Prophecy : Its Origin, Historical Growth, and Eelation to New Testament Fulfilment. By Dr. Edward Eiehm. New Edition, Translated by Eev. L. A. Muirhead, B.D. With an Intro- duction by Prof. A. B. Davidson, D.D. In post 8vo, price 7s. 6d. ' No work of the same compass could be named that contains so much that is instructive on the nature of prophecy in general, and particulai'ly on the branch of it specially treated in the book.'— Professor A. B. Davidson, D.D. ' I would venture to recommend Eiehm's ' ' Messianic Prophecy " as a summ.iry account of prophecy both reverent and critical.' — Canon Goke in Lux Mnndi, T. & T. Clark's Publications. SCHULTZ'S OLD TESTAMENT THEOLOGY. Old Testament Theology. The Eeligion of Kevelation in its Pre-Christian Stage of Development. By Professor Heemann ScHULTZ, D.D., Gbttingen. Authorised English Translation by Professor J. A. Paterson, D.D. In Two Volumes, 8vo, Second Edition, price 18s. net. ' Professor Paterson has executed the translation with as much skill as care. . . . Beaders may rely on his having given the meaning of the original with the utmost accuracy.' — From the Author's Preface to the Translation. ' The book will be read with pleasure, and, it need not be said, with profit, not only by professional students, but by all intelligent persons who have an interest in the Old Testament. . . . Though externally popular and of singular literary finish, the author's work within is a laborious and able study of the whole subject.' — Professor A. B. Davidson, D.D. ' A standard work on this subject may be said to be indispensable to eveiy theologian and minister. The book to get, beyond all doubt, is this one by Schultz, which Messrs. Clark have just given to us in English. It is one of the most interesting and readable books we have had in our hands for a long time.'— Professor A. B. BEncE, D.D. KAFTAN'S TRUTH OF THE CHRISTIAN RELIGION. The Truth of the Christian Religion. By Professor Julius Kaftan, Berlin. Translated from the German, under the Author's supervision, by G. Feheies, D.D. With a Prefatory Note by Professor Plint, D.D. In Two Volumes, Svo, price 16s. net. SuMMAaT OF Contents : — Division I. Ecclesiastical Dogma — The Origin of Dogma — Development of Theology — ^Orthodox Dogmatics — Breaking-up of Ecclesias- tical Dogma — Judgment of History. Division II. The Proof of Ohristianity — Knowledge — The Primacy of Practical Reason — Criticism of the Traditional Spectilative Method — The Proof of Christianity — Conclusion. ' Eminently a work which the times require, and will be cordially welcomed by all students of theology.'— iScoismaw. • ' Quite apart from the immediate question of obtaining a knowledge of the Eitschlian theology at first hand, these volumes are welcome. For Kaftan is no imitator, but a fertile and able writer. In the near future his view of theology, its essence and its accidents, will exercise a deep influence in our land.' — The Expository Times. ' One of the most important productions of the Eitschlian School of Theology, and of special interest for the way in which it treats the proof of Ohristianity as a something "connected in the closest manner with the whole organisation of Christian faith and life at a given time.'" — The Critical Review. The Apostolic and Post-Apostolic Times : Their Diversity and Unity in Life and Doctrine. By Professor G. V. Lechler, D.D. Third Edition, thoroughly Eevised and Rewritten. In Two Volumes, crown Svo, price 16s. 'It contains a vast amount of historical information, and is replete with judicious remarks. ... By bringing under the notice of English readers a work so favourably thought of in Germany, the translator has conferred a benefit on theology.'— .4